Home

Adjustment Procedure

1. Figure 9 Constant Voltage Ripple and Noise Test Setup 3 Setup the oscilloscope to measure 100 mVj AC coupled 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 2 55 A OVP SET 38 V 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the C V indicator lights up on the display 6 Using a 0 1 uF ceramic capacitor to decouple the test points adjust the oscilloscope and verify that the noise is X30 mVp p 7 Setup the oscilloscope to LINE trigger source Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the ripple changes S3 mV p p over the adjustment range 8 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 9 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 10 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 4 11 Repeat steps 4 through 8 above Outputs 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 49 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 50 Constant Current Load and Overcurrent Protection Accuracy Ensure that the power supply out
2. Figure 4 Constant Voltage Ripple and Noise Test Setup 10 11 Set up the oscilloscope to measure 100 mV AC coupled Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 1 55 A OVP SET 38 5 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the C V indicator lights up on the display Using a 0 1 uF ceramic capacitor to decouple the test points adjust the oscilloscope and verify that the noise is X30 mVp p Set the oscilloscope to LINE trigger source Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220V range Verify that the ripple changes lt 3 mV over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 4 Repeat steps 4 through 8 above Outputs 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the oscilloscope and 2 2 Q 50 W resistor to the front pan
3. Diode Test 0 5 V 0 400 V 0 600 V Capacitance Test 2 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 5196 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 646 uF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 uF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF3 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF3 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 2 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Set the DMM to Delta mode Delta mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions 20 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM912 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum DC Milliampere Test 0 0 pA 10 counts 1 0 pA 1 0 pA 360 0 pA 0 5 10 counts 357 2 uA 362 8 uA 360 0 uA 0 5 10 counts 362 8 uA 357 2 pA 3600 0 uA 0 5 10 counts 3581 0 pA 3619 0 A 36 00 mA 0 5 10 counts 35 72 mA 36 28 mA 360 00 mA 0 5 10 counts 358 10 mA 361 90 mA AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 1 2 80 counts 3548 8 pA 3651 2 pA 360 00 mA 1 2 80 counts 354 88 mA Le 365 12 mA DC Ampere Test 10 000A 0 5 10 counts 9 940 A 10 060 A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz
4. Temperature Operating 0 to 40 C Nonoperating 40 to 70 C Tested to MIL T 28800D paragraphs 4 5 5 1 3 and 4 5 5 1 4 except in 4 5 5 1 3 steps 4 and 5 0 C operating test are performed ahead of step 2 40 C nonoperating test Equipment shall remain off upon return to room ambient during step 6 Excessive condensation shall be removed before operating during step 7 Altitude Operating 4 570 meters 15 000 feet Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 C per 300 m 1 000 feet above 1 500 m 5 000 feet Nonoperating 15 250 meters 50 000 feet Relative Humidity Operating 30 to 40 C 90 relative humidity 0 5 Nonoperating 30 to 60 C 90 relative humidity 4096 5 Five cycles 120 hours referenced to MIL T 28800D paragraph 4 5 1 2 2 for type Ill class 5 instruments Operating and nonoperating at 90 4096 5 relative humidity Vibration Operating 15 minutes along each of three major axes ata total displacement of 0 015 inch peak to peak 2 4 g at 55 Hz with frequency varied from 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute sweeps Hold for 10 minutes at 55 Hz in each of three major axes All major resonances must be above 55 Hz Shock Operating and Nonoperating 30 g half sine 11 ms duration three shocks per axis each direction for a total of 18 shocks Radiated and Conducted Emissions Meets EN55011 class A Safety Listed CSA C22 2 No 231 and UL1244 Table 9 Typical Mechanical Characteristics T
5. Volts Peak Hold Test 1 Vnus 60 Hz MAX 5 40 counts 1524V 1414 Vp 1 Vnus 60 Hz MIN 5 40 counts 1 524V 1 303V 1414 Vj DC Milliampere Test 10 counts 1 0 pA 1 0 pA 0 3 10 counts 358 0 uA 362 0 uA 360 0 pA 0 3 10 counts 362 0 uA 358 0 uA 3600 0 uA 0 3 10 counts 3588 2 uA 3611 8 pA 36 00 mA 0 3 10 counts 35 80 mA 36 20 mA 360 00 mA 0 3 10 counts 358 82 mA 361 18 mA 30 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM916 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 0 9 80 counts 3559 6 uA 3640 4 uA 360 00 mA 0 9 80 counts 355 96 mA Eo 364 04 mA 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency DC Ampere Test 10 000 A 40 395 10 counts 9 960A E 10 040 A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz 10 000 A 0 9 80 counts 9 830A 10 170A 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 31 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMO091X Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments 32 This section contains procedures to adjust DMM912 DMM914 and DMM916 multimeters Perform these procedures once a year or if the Performance Verification procedure indicates the need for calibration In this section y
6. Figure 11 Power and High Voltage Board Viewed from the Instrument Bottom 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VOLTS DIV 0 5 V CH 1 AC DC DC HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 0 2 ms TRIGGER COUPLING DC TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1 2 Connect the probe to the CH 1 input connector 3 Touch the probe tip to the PROBE COMP tab on the left side of the front panel 4 Adjust the probe compensation for a flat topped square wave on the display 5 Adjust VR701 on the Power and High Voltage board until one cycle spans five divisions See Figure 11 for the adjustment location 6 Verify that the display amplitude is 2 Vp p 2 and the duty cycle ratio is approximately 1 to 1 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 41 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Cursors and Readout Adjustments To locate the adjustments for the following procedures refer to Figure 13 The Control and I O board occupies the top left hand corner of the instrument Cursor Accuracy Use the following procedure to adjust the cursor accuracy 1 Simultaneously press the front panel PROBE X1 X10 and the AV AT 1 AT push switches to display the cursor calibration square Figure 12 Cursor Calibration Display 2 Onthe Control and I O board adjust the following potentiometers to position the alignment square as shown in Figure 12 See Figure 13 for the adjustment locations X
7. Source Effect Voltage lt 3 mV Current lt 3 mA Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 PS2520 Series Specifications Table 1 Operational Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Resolution Voltage 10 mV 20 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Current 1 mA 2 mA if rating current gt 3 5 A Overvoltage P rotection 10 mV 20 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Program Accuracy Voltage 0 0596 25 mV 50 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Current 0 296 10 mA Overvoltage P rotection lt 2 0 6 V Ripple and Noise 20 Hz to 20 MHz Voltage Ripple 1 mVams 3 MV p p Voltage Noise Current lt 3 mArms lt 5 MAr ws if rating current gt 3 5 A Temperature Coefficient 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Voltage 100 ppm 3 mV Current 150 ppm 3 mA Readback Resolution Voltage 10 mV 20 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Current 1 mA 2 mA if rating current gt 3 5 A Readback Accuracy Voltage lt 0 05 25 mV 50 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Current 0 296 10 mA Response Time 10 to 90 up 100 ms 90 to10 down 100 ms 21096 rating load Readback Temperature Coefficient Voltage 100 ppm 10 mV 20 mV if rating voltage gt 36V Current 150 ppm 10 mA Drift Voltage lt 0 03 6 mV Current lt 0 1 6 mA Series Tracking Tracking Error Voltage 0 196 50 mV Load Effect Voltage lt 50 mV Source Effect Voltage lt 3 mV 1 Change in output over an 8 hour interval
8. A SS PP ouo py Lift the circuit board assembly out of the top case half Set calibrator to output 100 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V Q46 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VC3 until the display shows 498 60 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 100 60 V Repeat step 5 if necessary Set the calibrator frequency to 1 kHz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 104 0 V Repeat step 5 if necessary NOTE Steps 10 through 17 do not apply to the DMM830 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Set the calibrator to output 20 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Adjust VC1 until the display shows 19 700 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 20 110 V Repeat step 11 if necessary Set the calibrator to output 2 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Adjust VC2 until the display shows 1 9700 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 2 011 V Repeat step 15 if necessary Reassembling the Multimeter 1 2 Ensure that the rotary dial is properly aligned Align the tabs of the bottom case half with the slots in the top case half at the end of the meter near the input connectors and that the battery wires are not pinched CAUTION Before closing the case check that the rotary dial is properly aligned
9. Adjust VC101 VC201 to flatten the waveform See Figure 10 for the adjustment locations Set the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control to 1 V Readjust the generator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude Adjust VC103 VC203 to flatten the waveform See Figure 10 for the adjustment locations For each setting of the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control adjust the generator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude Evaluate the waveform for optimum symmetry and flatness at each setting Set the VERTICAL MODE to CH2 and repeat steps 2 through 16 for CH 2 Channel 1 Output Use the following procedure to adjust the channel 1 output DC offset DC Offset Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE BOTH CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 GND In TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1 Position the CH 1 and CH 2 traces to the center horizontal graticule line with the VERTICAL POSITION controls Connect the rear panel CH 1 OUTPUT to the front panel CH 2 input with a 50 Q coaxial cable Set the CH 2 GND push switch to the out position On the Main board adjust VR112 to position the CH 2 trace to the center horizontal graticule line See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 35 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Horizontal Adjustments 36 X10 MAG Registration Horizontal Position 1 ms Timing To locate the adjustments fo
10. Err 016 appears on the readouts The voltage should increase in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 1 A Press CURRENT Y and verify that as you attempt to decrease the current below 0 000 A Err 019 appears on the readouts and the C C indicator lights up on the display The current should decrease in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout Press CURRENT ZA and verify that as you attempt to increase the current past 2 500 A Err 017 appears on the readouts The current should increase in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout To check the function of OUTPUT 2 press SHIFT gt OUT 2 Verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display then repeat steps 2 through 18 above To check the function of OUTPUT 3 press SHIFT gt OUT 3 Verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display then continue with the steps below 19 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 5V CURRENT SET 4A OVP SET 7N DELAY 3s Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 33 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 34 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Press SHIFT gt STORE gt 1 to store the above values in the memory 01 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 19 for memory location 01 Reset the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5A DELAY 3s Pr
11. Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DTM900 and DTM920 Performance Verification Set Up To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following 1 Warm up the thermometer for 60 minutes 2 Photocopy the test records on pages 7 through 9 Use them to record your test results Verification Procedure Implement the following tests to verify the temperature measurement accuracy of your DTM900 or DTM920 thermometer 1 Connect the thermocouple simulator output to the temperature probe input For the DTM920 connect the simulator to the T1 input connector then repeat the test using the T2 input connector NOTE Thermocouple connectors are temperature sensitive For best measure ment accuracy do not touch the connector contacts and minimize handling of the connector housings 2 Set the simulator to the correct probe type The DTM900 thermometer uses a K type probe The DTM920 thermometer can use either a K or J type probe 3 Foreach of the conditions specified in the test records do the following a Setthe thermometer Resolution to 0 1 or 1 DTM900 only b Set the thermometer to measure C or F c Set the calibrator to each of the temperature values shown in the test records then verify that the thermometer display reads within the specified Low and High limits 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Performance Verification DTM900 Test Recor
12. for the first verification turn the THM420 rotary switch to Az for the second verification 2 Set the THM420 DC AC button to DCA 3 Setthe current source to output DC 4 Connect the current source output to the THM420 COM and the V Q Hz input connectors 5 Set the controls of the THM420 and the current source to each of the values listed in Table 13 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits Table 13 DC Amperes Accuracy Readout Limits DC Current Source Minimum 200 0 mA 198 5 mA THM420 Rotary Switch Maximum 201 5 mA 2 06A 6 Do not disconnect the test setup AC Amperes The following check verifies AC ampere measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to mA 2 Set the THM420 DC AC button to ACA 3 Reconfigure the current source to output AC 4 Set the controls of the THM420 and the current source to each of the values listed in Table 14 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 THM420 Performance Verification 12 Trace Shift Trace Slope Table 14 AC Amperes Accuracy AC Current Source Readout Limits cmm Frequency minimum 200 0 mA 50 Hz 195 9 mA THM420 Rotary Switch Maximum 204 1 mA 5 Setthe METER SCOPE button to SCOPE mode 6 Verify that the current measurement is displayed 7 Disconnect the test setup
13. o oooooooocoooor e 12 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 0 cece eh 12 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DELL EUNT INE DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter The DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter measures DC current AC current and frequency The meter uses a Hall effect device to measure current without opening the circuit The meter automatically selects the correct measurement range and has a 4000 count resolution The maximum reading is 3999 The DCM330 meter provides true RMS readings for AC current ON OFF Figure 1 DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DCM330 Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F ambient environ ment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Description 2000 A for one minute 600 Va us CAT II 2 times per second nominal Overload P rotection Uninsulated Wire Voltage Measuring Rate AC Current Auto Ranging Ranges 400 A and 1000 A Uninsulated Wire Voltage Rating 600 V
14. Examples Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibration System or Fluke 5500A Calibrator Omega TECK 10 10 Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DTM900 and DTM920 adjustments W Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less m Warm up the thermometer for at least 30 minutes m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first m Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual NOTE Thermocouple connectors are temperature sensitive For best measure ment accuracy do not touch the connector contacts and minimize handling of the connector housings Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures 12 Open the Thermometer To make internal adjustments you must open the thermometer case and remove the circuit board see Figure 2 or Figure 3 1 2 Unplug the thermocouple s Lay the thermometer face down on a flat work surface Remove the single screw from the battery compartment cover with a Phillips head screwdriver and remove the battery compartment cover Remove the four screws from the corners of the thermometer Lift the top end of the cover and remove both the cover and the cap Remove the screws from the corners of the circuit board the
15. Front Panel controls circuit board Display Assembly circuit board E Master S lave circuit board y NS 5 V circuit board Sa Figure 6 PS280 PS283 Internal Circuit Board Locations 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Independent Mode Adjustments Refer to Figures 6 7 and 8 for the circuit board and adjustment locations used in this procedure MASTER Voltage Output To adjust the MASTER voltage output perform the following steps 1 10 11 Disengage both TRACKING mode switches both switches out so that the power supply is in the INDEPendent operating mode Set the MASTER AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to VOLTS Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 16 mV Set the PS280 PS283 MASTER VOLTAGE control to minimum fully counterclockwise Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the MASTER output Adjust VR102 Master Slave circuit board for a reading of 15 mV within 15 mV on the multimeter Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 35 V Set the MASTER VOLTAGE control to maximum fully clockwise Adjust VR101 Master Slave circuit board for a reading of 31 5 V on the multimeter Adjust VR201 Display Assembly circuit board until the PS280 PS283 front panel display reads 31 5 V Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply
16. Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 THM500 Series Performance Verification DMM Verification 12 DC Voltage Accuracy A The following checks verify the performance of the DMM functions The oscilloscope verification begins on page 15 NOTE The THM575 can display menus in more than one language The language selections are located in the Utility menu The following check verifies DC voltage accuracy WARNING This test uses hazardous voltages If you use standard banana plugs to apply test signals to the THM500 series instrument do not touch the exposed conductors 1 Set the THM500 series instrument to METER mode displaying V DC If the range display at the lower right does not indicate AUTO press the A and v buttons simultaneously to set the RANGE to AUTO 2 Connect the voltage source output to the THM500 series instrument DMM and COM inputs as shown in Figure 2 Assure that the ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument 3 Setthe voltage source for DC output 50 O cable le BNC to dual banana cable gt Voltage source THM5xx BNC to dual banana adapter Figure 2 DC and AC Voltage Accuracy Test Setups 4 For each row of Table 7 use the A and Y buttons to set the THM500 series instrument to the range specified in the first column then set the voltage source to the output vol
17. Record the DMM voltage V1 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 6 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals and connect them to rear panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 45 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 46 Constant Voltage Source Accuracy Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage source accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Set up the Variac Connect the power supply AC input to the Variac variable output Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 3 for details MA Power suppl Electronic load Digital multimeter REN Figure 8 Constant Voltage Source Test Setup 9 Set th
18. Repeat steps 6 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above This concludes the PS2521 and PS2521G performance verification procedures 54 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures This section contains procedures to adjust PS2520 Series power supplies If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information A list of the adjustments A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments Instructions on how to prepare instruments for adjustment Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your power supply meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section List of Adjustments Use the adjustments listed in Table 10 to return PS2520 Series power supplies to factory calibration Table 8 PS2520 Series Adjustments Full Calibration Output 1 Output 2 Parallel Output Current Offset Parallel Output Current Full Scale Output 3 Partial Calibration Voltage Offset Voltage Full Scale Current Offset Current Full Scale Overvoltage Protection Offset Overvoltage Protection Full Scale Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 55 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures Test Equipment Table 8
19. VR303 O O O VR306 O VR502 C VR302 C VR102 VR103 C Figure 7 Master Slave Circuit Board Adjustments Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures 18 SLAVE Voltage Output MASTER Current Output To 1 10 11 OJ O adjust the SLAVE voltage output perform the following steps Disengage both TRACKING mode switches both switches out so that the power supply is in the INDEPendent operating mode Set the SLAVE AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to VOLTS Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 16 mV Set the power supply SLAVE VOLTAGE control to minimum fully counterclockwise Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the SLAVE output Adjust VR302 Master Slave circuit board for a reading of 15 mV within 15 mV on the multimeter Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 35 V Set the SLAVE VOLTAGE control to maximum fully clockwise Adjust VR301 Master Slave circuit board for a reading of 31 5 V on the multimeter Adjust VR601 Display Assembly circuit board until the PS280 PS283 front panel display reads 31 5 V Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply 1044 O VR601 VR201 L O VR602 O VR202 O Figure 8 Display Assembly Circuit Board Adjustments To 1 adjust the MASTER current output perform the foll
20. ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS A DTM500 Series Digital Thermometers The Tektronix DTM510 and DTM520 are hand held digital thermometers that can measure temperature using a variety of thermocouple probes A K type surface measurement bead probe comes standard with both instruments The DTM510 thermometer uses a single K type probe the DTM520 uses K or J type probes The DTM520 thermometer has inputs for two probes and can perform differential measurements In addition the thermometers include the following features Temperature display in C or F A hold feature to freeze the display MIN and MAX readouts DTM510 thermometer includes MAX only A stopwatch DTMS520 only a a Ac C9 A a et i f uv FEN HNO Figure 1 DTM510 amp DTM520 Digital Thermometers Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DTM500 Series Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for 60 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Specifications marked with the symbol are chec
21. 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00kHz1 1Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V 0 15 10 counts 0 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if using the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Select the sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Duty Factor Test 50 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 90 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 10 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 9 9 10 1 squarewave 28 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM670 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Q Test 0 0000 Q1 0 3 10 counts 0 1000 Q 0 1000 Q 360 00 Q1 0 6 10 counts 357 74 Q 362 26 Q 3 6000 KQ 0 3 10 counts 3 5882 kO 3 6118 KQ 36 000 KQ 0 3 10 counts 35 882 kO 36 118 KQ 360 00 KQ 0 3 10 counts 358 82 kO 361 18 KQ 3 6000 MQ 0 6 10 counts 3 5774 3 6226 MQ 20 00 MQ 5 10 counts 18 90 M 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and set the DMM to Delta mode 2 Verify the DMM is in the 4 000 count mode for this test Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 kQ 0 6 1 count 3 577 KQ 3 623 kQ 36 00 KQ 30 696 1 count 35 77 KQ 36 23 KQ 360 0 KQ 0 6 1 count 357 7 KQ 362 3 KQ 3 600 MQ 0 6 1 count 3577 MQ hd 3 623 MQ 1 4000 count mode
22. 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Set the calibrator to output 2 0000 VAC at 60 Hz Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V O4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VR6 until the display shows 1 9999 to 2 0001 VAC Turn the calibrator output off Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to adjust the capacitance calibration 1 Set the multimeter dial to 4C 2 Null the residual DMM and lead capacitance offset a Using Fluke 5500A or Wavetek 9100 minus the 9105 front porch Set the calibrator output to OFF Connect the test leads to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM inputs Connect the multimeter COM lead to the calibrator common output Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key Connect the multimeter C V Q4c lead to the remaining calibrator output Set the calibrator output to ON b Using Wavetek 9100 with 9105 front porch Set the calibrator output to OFF Connect the multimeter test leads to the calibrator outputs Connect the calibrator common lead to the multimeter COM input Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A 96 key Connect the remaining calibrator output lead to the multimeter CV O4 input Set the calibrator output to ON 3 Set the calibrator to output 300 nF Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures We GE cx omo lm e Adjust VR2 until the disp
23. 2 66 gnus Nonoperating 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minutes each 3 48 gnus Table 6 Optical Interface Characteristics Characteristic Description 945 nm 38 kHz Reception Range Approximately 1 meter Infrared Wavelength Carrier Wavelength Table 7 Certifications Characteristic Description Certifications Listed UL3111 1 and CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the THM420 performs as warranted If your instrument fails any of the checks it needs adjustment and or repair The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C environment with a relative humidity of less than 80 m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The THM420 performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 8 Table 8 Performance Verification Checks DC Voltage AC Voltage Resistance Diode and Continuity Frequency DC Amperes AC Amperes Trace Shift Trace Slope Printer Back Light Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 7 THM420 Performance Verification Test Equipment Verification Procedure A DC Voltage The performance verification procedures use external
24. 300 0 A 3097 400 A 388 412 600A 578 622 1000A 34 A 966 1034 10 0 A 1 2 A 11 2 8 8 100 0 A 4 9 A 104 9 95 1 300 0 A 9 7 A 309 7 290 3 400 A 12 A 412 388 600 A 22 A 622 578 1000 A 34 A 1034 966 Table 9 Frequency Checks AC Current Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit 20A 3 Hz 0 017 kHz 0 023 kHz 20A 4 Hz 0 096 kHz 0 104 kHz 20A 10 kHz 80 Hz 9 92 kHz 10 08 kHz 10 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures This section contains procedures to adjust the DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your multimeter meets factory specifications perform the procedures in the Perfor mance Verification section List of Adjustments Use the adjustments listed in Table 10 to return the DCM910 clamp meter to factory calibration Table 10 DCM910 Adjustments PosiionEror ii s S S SCS AC Current DC Current Peak Hold Test Equipment The test equipment listed in Table 6 on page 6 is a complete list of
25. Disconnect the DMM from the power supply Press lt on the power supply and verify that the readout displays cL30 indicating overvoltage protection offset calibration Wait 10 seconds and verify that the readout displays cL31 indicating that the overvoltage protection full scale calibration is running Wait another 10 seconds for the readout to return to normal The calibration is complete Partial Calibration See Table 10 for a list of partial calibrations then proceed with the following steps NOTE Do not remove the instrument cover unless you intend to perform a voltage full scale calibration Select the power supply output to calibrate press SHIFT OUT 1 OUT 2 or OUT 3 gt For a Parallel Output calibration select OUT 2 Press SHIFT CURRENT Y Enter a calibration password on the keypad PS2520 amp PS2520G enter 2520 PS2521 amp PS2521G enter 2521 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL00 indicating calibration mode Configure the DMM function and range as outlined in table 12 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 63 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures 64 Table 12 Set DMM Function and Range Calibration Type DMM Function DMM Range All voltage calibrations DC Volts Autorange Current offset DC Amperes 2A Current full scale DC Amperes 10A 6 Connect the DMM to the power supply as outlined in table 13 Table 13 DMM to Power Supply Connection
26. Figure 4 Adjustment locations 2 M2 Perform the following steps to adjust the AC voltage calibration above 60 Hz 1 Set the multimeter dial to V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures A SS PP ouo py Lift the circuit board assembly out of the top case half Set calibrator to output 100 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V Q46 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VC3 until the display shows 498 60 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 100 60 V Repeat step 5 if necessary Set the calibrator frequency to 1 kHz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 104 0 V Repeat step 5 if necessary NOTE Steps 10 through 17 do not apply to the DMM912 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Set the calibrator to output 20 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Adjust VC1 until the display shows 19 700 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 20 110 V Repeat step 11 if necessary Set the calibrator to output 2 VAC at 10 kHz sinewave Adjust VC2 until the display shows 1 9700 V Set the calibrator frequency to 500 Hz sinewave Confirm that the reading is less than 2 011 V Repeat step 15 if necessary Reassembling the Multimeter 1 2 Ensure that the rotary dial is properly aligned Align the tabs of t
27. NOTE For the following series of tests the METER SCOPE button must remain in the SCOPE mode The following check verifies trace shift accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to V 5 2 Connect the THM420 COM input to the V Q Hz input with a shorting strap 3 Verify that there is no trace shift while using the 4 w buttons to switch between SCALE settings vertical volts division 4 Disconnect the test setup The following check verifies trace slope accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to V z Set the DC AC button to AC V Set the SCALE to 200 V with the 4 w buttons Set the horizontal time per division to 100 us with the 4 buttons Uo Ge c Connect the voltage source to the THM420 COM and the V O Hz input connectors e Set up the voltage source to output an AC voltage of 200 V at 1 kHz 7 Set the THM420 trigger slope to J and verify that the waveform display starts on the rising edge Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Performance Verification 8 Set the THM420 trigger slope to L and verify that the waveform display starts on the falling edge 9 Disable the voltage source output 10 Disconnect the test setup Printer The following check verifies printer operation 1 Press and hold the THM420 PRINT button for two seconds Verify that the B icon appears in the upper right corner of the display Back Light The following check verifies that the display ba
28. Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of 3 25 A Connect a variable load and the multimeter in series to the terminals of the 5 V FIXED 3A output Adjust the variable load until the multimeter displays 3 10 A Adjust VR402 5 V circuit board until the OVERLOAD 5V3A indicator starts to light on the power supply Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix PS2520 Series Power Supplies 070 9854 00 rm a Table of Contents PS2520 Series Power Supplies eee 1 Specifications ec eree eere a Sin BG Rego ih e e 3 Performance Verification cece cece reece rece eee 7 Test Equipment ess ce ste sire cen D og c Aon as Boia a Mec sn 8 Set Up ke oe E OE EUM pO due Sen NEP ede ERR 8 PS2520 and PS2520G Checks creirias i irene PONNE e 9 PS2521 and PS2521G Checks ssseessseeee eee 32 Adjustment Procedures o ooooooooooooocmocsorosososso 55 List of Adjustments 0 0 0 cece e n 55 Test Equipment 1 gcc ae ere cis 56 Preparation for Adjustment 0000s cece ee 56 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 ccc cect eh 58 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service EA D mCS PS2520 Series Power Supplies The Tektronix PS2520 PS2520G PS2521 and PS2521G power supplies are multifunction ben
29. 10 000 A 1 2 80 counts 19 800 A 10 200 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM914 Test Records Procedure performed by Date Serial Number DMM914 Test Record AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 40 895 40 counts 3 5672 V 3 6328 V 2 0 40 counts 3 5240V 3 6760 V 3 5 40 counts 3 4700V 3 7300 V 36 000 V 500 Hz 2 0 40 counts 35 240V 36 760 V 10 kHz 3 5 40 counts 34 700 V 37 300 V 360 00 V 2 0 40 counts 35240V 367 60 V 3 5 40 counts 347 00V 373 00 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 0 8 40 counts 740 0V 760 0 V 1 2 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz The upper display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency Verify the proper DMM range 5 display digits use the manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 1 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 1 10 counts 3 5954 V 3 6046 V 3 6000 V 0 1 10 counts 3 6046 V 3 5954 V 36 000 V 0 1 10 counts 35 954 V 36 046 V 360 00 V 0 1 10 counts 359 54 V 360 46 V 1000 0 V 0 1 10 counts 998 0 V 1002 0 V 1000 0 V 0 1 10 counts 1002 0 V 998 0 V 22 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM914 Test Record Cont Test Input DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 0 10 mV 0
30. 10 counts 35 846 kO 36 154 KQ 360 00 KQ 0 4 10 counts 358 46 kO 361 54 KQ 3 6000 MQ 0 8 10 counts 3 5702 3 6298 MQ 20 00 MO 5 10 counts 18 90 M 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and set the DMM to Delta mode 4 000 count mode only Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 KQ2 3 570 KQ 3 630 KQ 36 00 kQ 0 8 1 count 35 70 kQ 36 30 KQ 360 0 KQ 0 8 1 count 357 0kQ 363 0 KQ 3 600 MQ 0 8 1 count 3 570 MQ Dl 3 630 MQ 1 4000 count mode only 2 Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6k Q Continuity Test 0 00 Beepersounds 150 Q Beeper does not sound EE Multimeter Leads Shorted Beeper sounds Diode Test 0 5 V 0 400 V 0 600 V 24 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM914 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Capacitance Testi 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 1 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 646 UF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 uF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF3 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF3 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Set the DMM to Delta mode Delta
31. 4 Toggle the TRACKING 9 OCE switch to select only the 0 cursor 5 Position the 0 cursor 4 divisions to the left of the display vertical center with the CURSOR POSITION switch 6 Toggle the TRACKING 9 O REF push switch to select only the O cursor 7 Position the O cursor 4 divisions to the right of the display vertical center with the CURSOR POSITION switch 8 Verify that the AT readout at the top left corner of the display reads between 7 72 and 8 28 ms 9 Setthe VERTICAL MODE switch to CH2 and repeat steps 4 through 8 for CH 2 To check cursor AV measurement accuracy implement the following steps Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 VERTICAL VOLTS DIV 1V 2 Press and hold the oscilloscope AV AT 1 AT push switch until two horizontal cursors appear on the display 3 Toggle the TRACKING 9 OCE switch to select only the 0 cursor 4 Position the 0 cursor 3 divisions above the display horizontal center with the CURSOR POSITION switch 5 Toggle the TRACKING 9 OE push switch to select only the O cursor Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification 6 Position the O cursor 3 divisions below the display horizontal center with the CURSOR POSITION switch 7 Verify that the AV 2 readout at the top left corner of the display reads between 5 78 and 6 22 V 8 Setthe VERTICAL MODE switch to CH2 and repeat steps 3 through 7 for
32. 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz t 0 01 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00 kHz 1Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V5 0 15 10 counts 10 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if using the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Selectthe sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Q Test 0 00 Q1 30 596 10 counts 0 100 0100 360 00 Q1 1 10 counts 356 300 363 70 Q 3 6000 kO 0 5 10 counts 3 5810 3 6190 kO 36 000 kO 0 5 10 counts 35 810 36 190 kO 360 00 kO 0 5 10 counts 358 10 kO 361 90 kO 3 6000 MQ 1 10 counts 3 5630 MQ 3 6370 MQ 20 00 MO 5 10 counts 18 90 MQ 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and set the DMM to Delta mode 2 4000 count mode only Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM912 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 kQ 1 1 count 3 563 kQ 3 637 kQ 36 00 kO 1 1 count 35 63 kO 36 37 KQ 360 0 kO 1 1 count 356 3 KQ 363 7 kQ 3 600 MO 1 1 count 3 563 MQ 3 637 MQ 1 4000 count mode only Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6kQ Continuity Test 0 0 0 Beeper sounds 150 Q Beeper does notsound
33. AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 40 895 40 counts 3 5672 V 3 6328 V 2 0 40 counts 3 5240V 3 6760 V 3 5 40 counts 3 4700V 3 7300 V 36 000 V 500 Hz 2 0 40 counts 35 240V 36 760 V 10 kHz 3 5 40 counts 34 700 V 37 300 V 360 00 V 2 0 40 counts 35240V 367 60 V 3 5 40 counts 347 00V 373 00 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 0 8 40 counts 740 0V 760 0 V 1 2 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz The upper display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency Verify the proper DMM range 5 display digits use the manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 1 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 1 10 counts 3 5954 V 3 6046 V 3 6000 V 0 1 10 counts 3 6046 V 3 5954 V 36 000 V 0 1 10 counts 35 954 V 36 046 V 360 00 V 0 1 10 counts 359 54 V 360 46 V 1000 0 V 0 1 10 counts 998 0 V 1002 0 V 1000 0 V 0 1 10 counts 1002 0 V 998 0 V 22 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM650 Test Record Cont Test Input DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 0 10 mV 0 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 39 86 mV 40 14 mV 360 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 359 54 mV 360 46 mV 360 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 360 46 mV 359 54 mV AC DC Volts Test 000000000000 1 000 V 2 0 14 counts 1 034 V 1 000 V DC 2 0 14 counts
34. C C indicator lights up on the power supply display Record the DMM current reading I1 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the wire connect ing the power supply OUTPUT terminal to the electronic load terminal Move the electronic load connection to the power supply OUTPUT terminal Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Record the DMM current reading again I2 Verify that the difference between I1 and I2 is lt 0 003 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press OCP ON OFF verify that the OCP indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the power supply readouts display the error message Err 012 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press OCP ON OFF to return the power supply to normal operation Verify that the OCP indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 5 Repeat steps 4 through 18 above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 51 PS2520 Seri
35. DTM520 Test Record Serial Number Procedure Performed By Date Probe Type Low Limit Test Result High Limit Emaec me A 99 0 C 08 2 0 09 C 0 7 50 0 C 50 8 500 0 C 501 2 998 0 C 999 7 1360 C 1365 317 144 5 14 101 5 500 F 501 9 990 F 992 4 1980 F 1988 2480 F 2471 2489 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTMS00 Series Performance Verification DTM520 Test Record Cont 0 0 F 1 6 1 6 100 0 F 98 3 101 7 500 0 F 497 9 502 1 990 0 F 987 4 992 6 1390 F 1384 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1396 DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments Test Equipment 10 This section contains procedures to adjust DTM510 and DTM520 thermometers If your thermometer fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your thermometer meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in T
36. disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Use Caution When Servicing the CRT To avoid electric shock or injury use extreme caution when handling the CRT Only qualified personnel familiar with CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off Before attempting any servicing discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to chassis ground When discharging the CRT connect the discharge path to ground and then the anode Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode Do not nick or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it When handling the CRT wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections X Radiation To avoid x radiation exposure do not modify or otherwise alter the high voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure X ray emissions generated within this product have been sufficiently shielded vi Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service A I 14 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Follow the
37. lt 6 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals and connect them to OUTPUT 3 on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification Constant Voltage Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage source accuracy Source Accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Setup the Variac Connect the power supply AC input to the Variac variable output Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 3 for details e Power suppl Electronic load Digital multimeter A Figure 3 Constant Voltage Source Test Setup 3 Set the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC 4 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 5 Set up the power supply as follows
38. mV TRIGGER MODE AUTO HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 0 5 ms CH 1 CH 2 GND Out release 3 Setthe oscilloscope CH 1 VOLTS DIV Scale and calibration generator output to each of the values listed in Table 13 then verify that the readings on the oscilloscope remain within the limits of the Displayed Signal Accuracy Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Table 13 DC Gain and Displayed Signal Accuracy TAS 200 Volts Div Scale Generator Output Displayed Signal Accuracy 1mV 5 mV 4 75 to 5 25 div 2mV 10 mV 4 75 to 5 25 div 5 mV 20 mV 3 88 to 4 12 div 10 mV 50 mV 4 85 to 5 15 div 20 mV 0 1V 4 85 to 5 15 div 50 mV 0 2V 3 88 to 4 12 div 100 mV 0 5 V 4 85 to 5 15 div 200 mV 1V 4 85 to 5 15 div 500 mV 2V 3 88 to 4 12 div 1V 5V 4 85 to 5 15 div 2V 10V 4 85 to 5 15 div 5V 20V 3 88 to 4 12 div 4 Set the calibration generator output to 5 mV 5 Return the oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control to 1 mV 6 Rotate the oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 VERTICAL VARIABLE control counterclockwise off of the CAL position until the amplitude of the displayed waveform is reduced to two divisions or less 7 Set the oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 VERTICAL VARIABLE control to the CAL position 8 Disconnect the test setup from the oscilloscope 9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 for CH 2 10 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification DC Coupled Ba
39. the inductance of the DCM330 may shut down the output of some calibrators If this happens decrease the calibrator output frequency until the output remains on for the duration of the test Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Performance Verification Table 8 DC Current Checks m 010 100 0 A 1049 300 0 A 3097 400 A 388 412 600A 578 622 1000A 34 A 966 1034 10 0 A 1 2 A 11 2 8 8 100 0 A 4 9 A 104 9 95 1 300 0 A 9 7 A 309 7 290 3 400 A 12 A 412 388 600 A 22 A 622 578 1000 A 34 A 1034 966 Table 9 Frequency Checks AC Current Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit 20A 3 Hz 0 017 kHz 0 023 kHz 20A 4 Hz 0 096 kHz 0 104 kHz 20A 10 kHz 80 Hz 9 92 kHz 10 08 kHz 10 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures This section contains procedures to adjust the DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your multimeter meets factory specifications perform the procedur
40. 02 Press SHIFT RECALL then enter 1 2 Press RECALL LAST verify that the readouts display the data stored in the memory 02 location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press RECALL LAST again verify that the readouts now display the data stored in the memory 01 location Press RECALL NEXT verify that the readouts display the data stored in the memory 02 location Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Press AUTO SEQ ON OFF and verify that the AUTO indicator lights up on the display Verify that the front panel readouts alternately display the memory 01 and memory 02 setups from steps 2 and 4 above every three seconds Press AUTO SEQ ON OFF and OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the AUTO and OUT indicators turn off Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 1 00 V Press VOLTS Z and verify that as you attempt to decrease the voltage below 0 00 V Err 018 appears on the CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts The voltage should decrease in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press VOLTS A and verify that as you attempt to increase the voltage past 37 00 V Err 016 appears on the readouts The voltage should increase in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to l A Press CURRENT Y and verify that as you attempt to dec
41. 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 39 86 mV 40 14 mV 360 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 359 54 mV 360 46 mV 360 00 mV 0 1 10 counts 360 46 mV 359 54 mV AC DC Volts Test 000000000000 1 000 V 2 0 14 counts 1 034 V 1 000 V DC 2 0 14 counts 0 966 V 1 034 V 1 000 V 60 Hz 2 0 14 counts 0 966 V 1 034 V 1 4000 count mode only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 0 01 10 counts 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V 0 15 10 counts 0 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if using the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Select the sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Duty Factor Test 50 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 90 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 10 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 9 9 10 1 squarewave Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 23 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM914 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Q Test 0 0000 Q1 0 4 10 counts 0 1000 Q 0 1000 Q 360 00 Q1 0 8 10 counts 357 02 Q 362 98 Q 3 6000 KQ 0 4 10 counts 3 5846 kO 3 6154 KQ 36 000 KQ 0 4
42. 104 F ambient environ ment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least twenty minutes NOTE All characteristics are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user cs Description One fixed 5 VDC two variable 0 to 30 VDC 5 0 VDC 0 25 VDC at 3 0 A maximum foldback current limited PS280 0 to 30 VDC constant at 2 0 A constant maximum PS283 0 to 30 VDC constant at 1 0 A constant maximum lt 5 mV P5280 lt 0 01 3 mV PS283 lt 0 01 5 mV lt 0 2 3 mA lt 0 2 x 0 0196 3 mV rating current lt 3 A lt 0 01 5 mV rating current gt 3 A PS280 lt 300 mV 0 to 60 VDC single series tracking supply lt 0 2 3 mA Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Specifications Table 1 Operational Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Ripple and Noise 5V lt 2 mVams CV 5 Hz to 1 MHz lt 1 mVams CC lt 3 M rms Temperature coefficient CV lt 300 ppm C Recovery time CV x 100 us time to recover after a 50 load change with 0 5 A minimum Tracking error SLAVE 0 595 10 mV of the MASTER supply Indicator Two 372 digit 0 5 inch LED panel displays Meter indicators 0 to 30 VDC 0 5 of RDG 2 digits 0 to 2 A 0 5 of RDG 2 digits Insulation Chassis to terminals z 20 MQ at500 VDC Chassis to AC cord z 30 MQ at500 VDC Table
43. 2 Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Description Line Voltage 90 to 110 108 to 132 198 to 242 and 216 to 250 VAC Line Frequency 50 to 60 Hz Power Consumption PS 280 348 VA 250 W maximum PS 282 254 VA 172 W maximum Table 3 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F 70 relative humidity Nonoperating Temperature 10 to 70 C 14 to 158 F lt 80 relative humidity Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Specifications Table 4 Physical Characteristics Characteristic Description Width 255 mm 10 04 inch Height 145 mm 5 71 inch Depth 335 mm 13 19 inch Weight P5280 11 5 kg 25 3 Ib PS283 9 0 kg 19 8 Ib 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that PS280 or PS283 power supplies perform as warranted Implement the performance verification procedures whenever the accuracy or function of your instrument is in question The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 104 F ambient environment m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes before the verification begins W The cabinet remains in
44. 5 If your THMS500 series instrument is equipped with two channels repeat Step 4 above on CH 2 all tests 6 Disconnect the test setup Crosstalk from scope The following check assesses the crosstalk between the DMM and the oscillo 1 Connect the leveled sine wave generator output to the THM500 series instrument DMM and COM inputs Use a 50 Q termination as shown in Figure 9 Assure that the ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification 2 Connect the THM500 series instrument CH 1 input to the COM input using a patch cord as shown in Figure 9 50 Q cable 50 Q termination BNC to dual banana cable Leveled Sine Wave generator THM5xx NB COM Figure 9 Crosstalk Between DMM And Scope Test Setup 3 Set the leveled sine wave generator for a 2 5 Vp p signal at 5 MHz 4 On the THM500 series instrument press the POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows SCALE in the lower right corner Use the A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to 50 mV div and the and buttons to set the time base to 2000 ps div 5 Use the THM500 series instrument menus to set the sampling mode to SPIKE DETECT then remove the menus from the display 6 Verify that the peak to peak amplitude is less than 0 5 divisions
45. AV AT 1 AT Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 TAS 200 Series Specifications Table 4 Trigger Characteristics Characteristic TAS 220 Description TAS 250 Performance Description Sensitivity 0 5 divisions internal 0 1 V external DC to 5 MHz DC to 10 MHz 1 5 divisions internal 0 2 V external 5 to 20 MHz 10 to 50 MHz 2 0 divisions internal 0 2 V external Video Video Input Impedance Typical 1MO 30 pF Maximum Input Signal 100 V DC 4 peak AC Table 5 Typical Z Axis Characteristics TAS 200 Series Characteristic Maximum Input Voltage Description 50 V DC peak AC Sensitivity 3 Vp p Trace becomes brighter with negative input Frequency Bandwidth DC to 5 MHz Input Resistance 5kQ Table 6 Typical X Y Mode Operation Characteristic TAS 250 Description Sensitivity Same as CH 1 vertical axis Sensitivity Accuracy 5mV to5V div 4 1 to 2 mV div 6 Frequency Bandwidth DC to 1 MHz DC to 2 MHz X Y Phase Difference lt 3 from DC to 50 kHz lt 3 from DC to 100 kHz EXT HOR Sensitivity 0 1 V div Table 7 Typical Probe Compensation Signal Characteristics TAS 200 Series Characteristic Description Waveform Positive going square wave Frequency 1kHz Duty Ratio 50 50 Output Level 2 Vp p Output Resistance 2kQ 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Specifications Table 8 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description
46. CH 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments 20 This section contains procedures to adjust TAS 220 and TAS 250 oscilloscopes If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments Wm A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare instruments for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your oscilloscope meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in Table 18 to return TAS 220 and TAS 250 oscillo scopes to factory calibration Table 18 TAS 220 and TAS 250 Adjustments Power Supply Adjustments 12 V Supply Intensity Focus and Astigmatism Vertical Adjustments DC Balance Variable DC Balance Channel 2 Inverted Balance and Position Center ADD Mode Balance Vertical Gain MAG Sensitivity High Frequency Compensation Attenuator Compensation Channel 1 Output DC Offset Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Table 18 TAS 220 and TAS 250 Adjustments Cont Horizontal Adjustments X10 Magnification Registration Ho
47. Check Perform the following steps to verify the resistance measurement accuracy in LV mode 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Q Push the BLUE button to select the LV mode Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Low Voltage Q Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Continuity Check Perform the following steps to verify the continuity check accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Continuity Test record and verify proper operation Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification 14 Diode Check Capacitance Check 6 Insert the multimeter test leads into the C V O4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter 7 Shortthe test leads together and check for proper operation Perform the following steps to verify the diode check accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to 2 Push the BLUE button to select the diode test mode 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input con
48. DMM to Oscilloscope Crosstalk Between Oscilloscope Channels DC Offset Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 THM500 Series Performance Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 6 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Leveled Sine Wave Generator Output must provide 5 V into 50 O with 3 amplitude regulation at 50 kHz to 5 MHz Time Mark Generator Output must provide 1 us markers 0 5 at 1 V amplitude Example Product Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibration System with Oscilloscope Calibration Module Option 250 Fluke 5500A Multi product Calibrator with Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500 SC Calibrator DC Voltages AC Voltages Resistances Termination BNC Cable Safety Banana Lead Patch Cord BNC Female to Dual Banana Cable BNC Female to Dual Banana Adapter 10 300 mV 3 V 30 V 300 V 500 V with accuracy of 0 12
49. Disconnect the calibrator AC Voltage Check To check the AC voltage accuracy perform the following steps the multimeter circuit board WARNING To avoid electric shock avoid touching the exposed connections on Set the multimeter function switch to the V position Connect the AC voltage calibrator output to the multimeter V Q and COM input terminals Set the calibrator to each of the values listed in Table 8 on page 8 and verify that the multimeter display reads within the specified Low and High limits Disconnect the current calibrator Resistance and Continuity To check the resistance accuracy and verify the continuity function perform the Check following steps 1 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Set the multimeter function switch to the Q position Connect the resistance calibrator output to the multimeter V Q and COM input terminals Set the calibrator to each of the values listed in Table 9 on page 9 and verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High limits Disconnect the calibrator DCM300 and DCM320 Performance Verification Test Records Serial Number Procedure performed by Date Table 7 AC Current Checks AC Current Calibrator Output Test Frequency Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit 0A 00 5 10 0A 10 7 10 7 100 0 A 1024 1024 300 0 A 306 2 306 2 400A 417 417 600 A 622 Table 8 AC Voltage Chec
50. Do not remove the circuit board mounting screws To reassemble the meter following the adjustments perform steps 2 and 3 above in reverse order To return your instrument to factory calibration perform the following proce dures WARNING The following procedures produce magnetic fields that may cause a malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment To adjust the AC current calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set up the AC current calibrator to output 100 A at 50 Hz Set the multimeter function switch to the A position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the AC current calibrator output by 100 A at 50 Hz Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustment Procedures 12 AC Voltage A Resistance Continuity Position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Adjust VR2 with a small flat tipped screwdriver set the multimeter reading to 100 0 Remove the clamp meter from the calibrator current loop To adjust the AC voltage calibration perform the following steps WARNING To avoid electrical shock avoid touching the exposed connections on the multimeter circuit board Set up the AC voltage calibrator to output 300 V at 500 Hz DCM300 or 300 V at 50 Hz DCM320 Set the multimeter function switch to the V position Connect
51. F 0 2 F 0 3 2 2 F 99 9 to 760 C 147 9 to 999 9 F 0 22 F 1000 to 1400 F 2 F 0 1 C Description ATPO1 bead probe 40 to 204 C ATP 01 bead probe 2 2 C 2 5 1 0 5 0 1 0 8 C 0 1 1 6 F 0 3 2 F 24 V maximum Class Ill as defined in IEC 1010 Safety Requirements for Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Class Ill equipment is equipment for connection to SELV or SELV E circuits only 20 KQ minimum Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Specifications Table 3 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature coefficient 18 C or 228 C DTM510 0 15 x specified accuracy per C DTM520 0 1 x specified accuracy per C Operating temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F at 0 to 75 RH Storage temperature 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F at 0 to 80 RH Power requirements Single standard 9 V battery NEDA 1604 JIS 006P IEC 6F22 size Battery life Alkaline DTM510 250 hours DTM520 90 hours 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTMS00 Series Performance Verification Performance Verification Test Equipment This section contains procedures to verify that the DTM510 and DTM520 thermometers perform as warranted If an instrument fails any of the checks it needs adjustment and or repair Verify the performance of your thermometer annually or w
52. Figure 8 for the adjustment locations 8 Readjust VR103 VR203 to reduce peak aberrations to less than 0 24 divi sions while maintaining peak to peak aberrations less than 0 36 divisions See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations 9 Connect a 50 kHz sine wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform six divisions in amplitude on the display 10 Increase the frequency to 20 MHz for the TAS 220 or 50 MHz for the TAS 250 Verify that the waveform amplitude exceeds 4 2 divisions at these frequencies 11 Set the oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV to 1 mV and the sine wave generator to 50 kHz Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform eight divisions in amplitude on the display 12 Increase the frequency to 10 MHz for the TAS 220 or 15 MHz for the TAS 250 Verify that the waveform amplitude exceeds 5 6 divisions at these frequencies 13 If steps 10 or 12 fail the specified criteria repeat steps 7 8 and 9 14 Set the VERTICAL MODE to CH2 and repeat steps 2 through 13 for CH 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 33 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Attenuator Compensation 34 Use the following procedure to adjust the vertical input attenuator compensation 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE BOTH CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 0 1 V CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC 2 Connecta 1 kHz square wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust the gene
53. Gain VRAOI X Position VRAO2 Y Gain VRAO3 Y Position VRAO04 3 Simultaneously press the PROBE X1 X10 and the AV AT 1 AT push switches again to exit the adjustment mode 42 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Y gain Y pos VRAO3 O VRAO4 Qa vrao1 VRA05 X gain gt Qe X pos VRA02 Drift Instrument front V Figure 13 Control and I O Board Viewed from the Instrument Top Drift Use the following procedure to minimize the readout drift 1 Ifthe display readouts are not visible simultaneously press the front panel PROBE X1 X10 and the CURSOR ON OFF push switches 2 While toggling the VERTICAL MODE switch between BOTH and ADD positions adjust VRAOS on the Control and I O board to minimize the character drift 3 Simultaneously press the PROBE X1 X10 and the AV AT 1 AT push switches to turn off the display readouts if desired Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 43 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 44 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix THM420 Digital Multimeter 070 9856 00 AA ni Table of Contents THM420 Digital Multimeter eee 1 Sp cifications 0 crese Verve e tw Sn BG ceo nih er E 2 Performance Verification 0 cece cece cece eee eee eeee 7 Testi Eg ipment rass cs cA stink aces e Mi
54. MHz 396 vertical deflection accuracy 35 V 4A 0 196 Accuracy 200 30W 100 30W 20 5W 10 30W 710 140 W 050 5W 150 70W 300 140W 7150 140W 300 40W 600 70W 0to2Q 30W Insulated Example Product Tektronix TDS 300 Series Oscilloscope Tektronix DMM914 Digital Multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification Constant Current Load Regulation Check MASTER Current Regulation INDEP mode To check the constant current load regulation of your power supply perform the following tests Power supply DMM Shorting strap Figure 2 Constant Current Test Setup The following check verifies the INDEP mode MASTER current regulation performance 1 Setthe power supply to the INDEP operating mode by disengaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches out 2 Set the power supply MASTER AMPS VOLTS selection switch to AMPS 3 Setup the digital multimeter to measure 25 VDC 4 Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the power supply MASTER output 5 Adjust the power supply MASTER VOLTAGE control until the multimeter reads 25 VDC 6 Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply 7 Setthe digital multimeter to measure a DC current of at least 1 A PS280 or 0 5 A PS283 8 Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the and terminals of the power supply MASTER output as shown in Figure 2 S
55. No 1010 1 92 e jejo Withstands incidental line surges up to 6 kV comprised of a minimum rise time of 1 2 us and a maximum 50 us duration minimum of 2 minutes between pulses Maximum volt hertz product 50 V MHz Fuse The instrument has no user replaceable fuses e e General Safety Class 2 o o o 8 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the THM500 Series instruments perform as warranted Verify instrument performance whenever the accuracy or function of your instrument is in question The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates within the environmental conditions specified in Table 4 on page 8 during the verification process m The instrument operates continuously for a 5 minute period before the verification begins Table 6 lists the equipment needed to complete the performance verification procedures The THM500 Series performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks Functional Test DMM Verification DC Voltage Accuracy AC Voltage Accuracy Resistance Accuracy Oscilloscope Verification Noise Input Leakage Trace Shift Time Base Accuracy Vertical Accuracy Analog Bandwidth Crosstalk from
56. On the THM500 series instrument press the POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows SCALE in the lower right corner 4 Foreach row of Table 11 perform the following steps a Use the THM500 series instrument A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to the setting listed in the first column b Set the horizontal scale of the THM500 series instrument to 10 us div and the frequency of the leveled sine wave generator to 50 kHz c Adjust the leveled sine wave generator amplitude to show the waveform height and cursor readout listed in the second column d Set the horizontal scale of the THM500 series instrument to 200 us div and the leveled sine wave generator to the test frequency listed in the third column e Verify that the amplitude of the waveform displayed on the THM500 series instrument is greater than or equal to the value listed in the third column Use the cursors for greater accuracy Table 11 Bandwidth Test Settings THM500 Series Leveled Sine Wave Leveled Sine Wave Instrument Waveform Vertical Scale Generator Amplitude Generator Test Frequency Amplitude 100 mV div 6 divisions 5 MHz 4 2 divisions 600 mV 5 readout 420 mV cursor readout 500 mV div 6 divisions 5 MHz 4 2 divisions 3 00 Vp p readout 2 1 V cursor readout 5 Vidiv 1 division 1MHz 0 7 divisions 5 00 Vp p readout 1 The waveform is aliased and appears untriggered DMM to Oscilloscope 20 3 5 V cursor readout
57. Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Set up the Variac Connect the power supply AC input to the Variac variable output Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and 27 Q 75 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 6 for details Digital multimeter Power supply E Resistor i Figure 11 Constant Current Source Test Setup 3 Set the DMM to measure 5 amperes DC 4 Press SHIFT OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 5 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 2 5A OVP SET 22 V 6 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 7 Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the DMM current variation is lt 0 003 A over the adjustment range 8 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 9 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 10 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polaritie
58. PS2520 Series Adjustments Cont Parallel Output Current Offset Parallel Output Current Full Scale To ensure accurate adjustments use the following or equivalent test equipment If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 9 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the adjustment procedures NOTE Before making any adjustment warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 9 Adjustment Test Equipment Description Digital Multimeter Minimum Requirements Example Product 415 digit Tektronix DM2510 or DM25210G DC volts accuracy 0 05 DC ampere accuracy 0 896 Preparation for Adjustment 56 Perform the adjustment procedures on an as needed basis If a power supply section fails a performance requirement or if a section is replaced or repaired adjust only that section Adjusting individual sections of the instrument rarely affects its total performance The following guidelines apply to all adjustments m Verify that the line voltage selector instrument rear is set to the correct voltage If you must change the selector setting disconnect the AC power before altering the setting m Remove the instrument cover for the voltage full scale calibrations only m Plug in and warm up the instrument for a
59. SNS GB ere m c 11 12 13 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Short the Peak Hold points indicated in Figure 2 Press PEAK HOLD to activate the function Adjust VR9 until the display reads 00 0 Remove the short Press PEAK HOLD to cancel the function Press PEAK HOLD again to verify that the display reads 00 0 Press PEAK HOLD to cancel the function Repeat steps 2 through 8 above until the display reads 00 0 Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 200 A at 400 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR10 until the display reads 200 0 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DCM910 Adjustment Procedures 14 Remove the clamp meter from the coil 15 Reassemble the meter Table 11 Summary of Adjustments Adjustment Circuit Name Mode Test Value Frequency Location Tolerance Display Min Display Max Position Error AC 380 A 50 Hz VRI 5 counts 0 count 5 counts DC Zero DC VR21 05 00 5 00 5 DC VR3 0 1 00 1 00 1 DC 400 A DC 200 0 A VR5 0 5 201 2 201 8 Range DC 1000 A DC 400 A VR6 1 399 401 Range AC 400 A AC 390 0 A 400 Hz VR8 0 1 395 5 396 5 Range AC 1000 A AC 400 A 400 Hz VR7 1 399 401 Range AC 200 0 A 120 Hz VR 102 0 1 199 9 200 1 1 Auto Zero points shorted 2 Pe
60. STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 02 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 18 6 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 7 Press VOLTS ZA to increase the power supply output voltage until the error message Err 013 appears on the readouts Verify that this event occurs between 34 68 and 37 32 V 8 Press SHIFT gt OVP RESET 9 Resetthe output voltage to 34 5 V 10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 above as necessary to determine the exact voltage 11 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 13 Repeat steps 2 through 11 above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 With the power supply still set to OUT 2 press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 2 Repeat steps 2 through 11 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above 3 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display 2 Press OVP SET set the OVP to 7 1 V Verify that the power
61. STEP SET current 0 1 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification PS2520 and PS2520G Checks To verify the function and performance of the PS2520 and PS2520G power supplies implement the following checks in sequential order To verify the function and performance of the PS2521 and PS2521G power supplies see page 32 NOTE To clear a memory location enter 0 as the VOLTS SET and CURRENT SET values then save the 0 values to the desired memory location For a list of error code descriptions see your User manual Basic Function Complete the following procedures to verify basic instrument function Outputs 1 2 and 3 Use the following steps to verify OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 3 basic function 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10 V CURRENT SET 1A OVP SET 38 V DELAY 3s Press SHIFT gt STORE gt 1 to store the above values in the memory 01 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 2 for memory location 01 Reset the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 11V CURRENT SET 11A OVP SET 38 V DELAY 3s Press SHIFT gt STORE gt 2 to store the above values in the memory 02 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 4 for memory location
62. See Table 8 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that the peak to peak ripple viewed on the oscilloscope is less than 3 mV Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification Constant Voltage Regulation Check MASTER Voltage Regulation To check the constant voltage regulation of your power supply perform the following tests Power supply DMM Figure 4 Constant Voltage Test Setup The following check verifies the MASTER voltage regulation performance Set the power supply to the INDEP operating mode by disengaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches out Set up the digital multimeter to measure 60 VDC Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the and terminals of the power supply MASTER output as shown in Figure 4 See Table 9 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that you can adjust the power supply from 0 to 30 V Set the power supply to the SERIES operating mode by engaging the left TRACKING mode switch switch in and disengaging the right TRACKING mode switch switch out Verify that you can adjust the power supply from 0 to 60 V Set the power supply to the PARALLEL operating mode by engaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches in Verify that you can adjust the power supply from 0 to 30 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 PS280 and PS283 Performance Verificati
63. Tektronix DMM912 DMM914 and DMM916 digital multimeters provide many features Table 1 lists the features of each meter for easy comparison Tektronix DMM 16 true ams LIGHT PEAKH DIGITS AUTOH lt wma Rance HOLD RECALL RESET A store serue Bar 6 COM Vac N CA CAIACA son NC UN S Ae Figure 1 DMM916 Digital Multimeter Table 1 DMM91X Series Digital Multimeter Features Feature DMM912 DMM916 40 000 display count e e Bargraph e e Centering and zooming e True RMS or average AC measurements e ELS Autorange e IN A e Measurements a DC AC voltage e oe e AC DC voltage e oe e DC AC current e EM e Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DMM 91X Series Digital Multimeters Table 1 DMM91X Series Digital Multimeter Features Cont Feature DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 Resistance e e Frequency e EN e Diodes and capacitors e oe e Continuity e oe e Duty factor oe e Temperature EM e Decibel e AC volts and amps with Hz display e Measurement hold 9 e Peak hold e Minimum maximum and average values e e M M A time stamp e Delta mode e e HI LO limits e Memory store and recall e e Backlight e Automatic fuse verification e EN e Improper input connection warning e META e 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Specifications Specificatio
64. Voltage Ranges 20 mV div to 200 V div CurrentRanges mA 2 to 500 mA div A 200 mA div to 10 A div Sample Rate 16 MS s Resolution 6 bits Coupling DC and AC 3 dB at 15 Hz Input Impedance 1MQ 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Specifications Table 3 Waveform Display Characteristics Cont Characteristic DC Accuracy Description 3 5 2 pixels Horizontal Sweep Time 100 ns div to 10 s div Using roll mode 0 2 s div to 10 s div Position Settings Leftedge 8 divisions shown after the trigger point Centerscreen 4 divisions shown before and after trigger point Right edge 8 divisions shown after the trigger point Trigger Trigger Mode Auto Coupling DC Slope Positive or negative Table 4 Physical Characteristics Characteristic Description Height 6 5 cm 2 56 inch Width 9 cm 3 54 inch Depth 20 8 cm 8 19 inch Weight With batteries approximately 640 g 22 6 02 Table 5 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature Operating Nonoperating Storage Humidity Operating Altitude Operating Nonoperating 0 to 50 C 20 to 70 C 0 to 40 C 8096 41 to 50 C lt 60 2 222 m 7290 ft 12 300 m 40354 ft Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 THM420 Specifications Table 5 Environmental Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Vibration Operating 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minutes each
65. and press The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete cL11 Voltage Full Scale Calibration To calibrate the full scale voltage adjust VR601 VR501 or VR401 using the instructions in Table 14 Refer to Figures 13 and 14 for the adjustment locations Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete Table 14 Voltage Full scale Adjustment Partial Calibration Instrument Model To Cal OUTPUT 1 To Cal OUTPUT 2 To Cal OUTPUT 3 PS2520 P 2520G Adjust VR601 for a Adjust VR501 for a Adjust VR 401 for a DMM reading of DMM reading of DMM reading of 6 5 V 37 00 V 37 00 V PS2521 PS2521G Adjust VR601 fora Adjust VR601 for a Adjust VR 601 for a DMM reading of DMM reading of DMM reading of 6 5 V 21 00 V 21 00 V cL20 Current Offset Calibration To calibrate the current offset enter the DMM reading in amperes on the power supply keypad and press lt The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete cL21 Current Full Scale Calibration To calibrate the full scale current enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press lt 4 The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete cL30 Overvoltage Protection Offset Calibration Wait 10 seconds for the calibra tion to complete cL31 Overvoltage Protection Full Scale Calibration Wait 10 seconds for the calibration to compl
66. between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Complete the following procedures to verify current setting and readout accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 9 10 11 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10V CURRENT SET 2 5A OVP SET 11V Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC across the front panel OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 2 485 and 2 515 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 2 500 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 2 485 and 2 515 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up
67. checked all ranges 10 mV div through 500 V div 9 If your THM500 series instrument is equipped with two channels repeat steps 3 through 8 above for CH 2 10 Disconnect the test setup 11 Use the menus to return the THM500 series instrument to the factory default settings select RESET ALL NOTE Return THM575 products to the initial language selection if you changed the language selection You will find these selections in the Utility menu Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 23 THM500 Series Performance Verification 24 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service
68. count 5 counts DC Zero DC VR21 05 00 5 00 5 DC 400A DC 200 0 A VR5 0 5 201 2 201 8 Range DC 1000A DC 400A VR6 1 399 401 Range AC 400A AC 390 0A 400 Hz VR8 0 1 395 5 396 5 Range AC 1000A AC 400A 400 Hz VR7 1 399 401 Range AC 200 0A 120 Hz VR 102 0 1 199 9 200 1 1 Auto Zero points shorted Peak Hold points shorted 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter 070 9849 00 AA ni Table of Contents DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter cece cece cere ree eeee 1 Sp cifications io e Skis yt tee SR ES ceo blew le OS 2 Performance Verification 00 cece cece eee cece eees 5 Test Bquipmient Li oA tint cen D og von as Baa ea Soc iOS 5 Set Ups oi sd eese n P CE OE UNE REGE Ri MERO eee 6 Verification Procedure ess aeeie a n 6 Test Records sS ssi ed A A UR eR bg Es 9 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmorsorososcoso 11 List of Adjustments seee sene e e e e e n 11 Test Equipment ie orp a E RR rr e err E cis 11 Preparation for Adjustment o oooooooocoooor e 12 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 0 cece eh 12 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service AAA DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter The DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter measures DC current AC current and frequency The meter uses a Hall effect device to meas
69. e Record Length 256 points Spike Detect Captures spikes down to 40 ns at all sweep speeds e Single Shot Single shoton two channels simultaneously e Roll 200 ms div to 60 s div e Measurements Cursors Voltage difference between cursors AV e Time difference between cursors AT Reciprocal of AT in Hertz 1 AT Voltage and Amperes For voltage or current probes Maximum MAX Minimum MIN P eak P eak e P P Timing Frequency FREQ Period PER o o e Power Calculates true RMS current voltage true power and power factor from CH 1 current using current probe and CH 2 voltage THDF Transformer Harmonic Derating Factor calculated as RMS Current x 1 41414 Peak Current read from a current probe on CH 1 Trigger Source CH 1 Default o o e Cee Modes Auto Level Default when in AutoRange mode e Auto Defaultin manual operation Normal User selectable Single Shot User selectable Slope Positive or Negative slope ejo jo Sensitivity Edge type DC Coupled 0 5 division 200 to 500 V div o jo o 10 to 100 mV div 5 mV div 1 division 2 divisions Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Specifications Table 3 Scope Specifications Cont Waveform Display Display Update Rate Memories Setups Waveforms Screens 550 560 565 Each setup memory stores the complete state of the instrument including the 4 418 multimeter state Each waveform memory stores all waveform points and
70. face down on a flat work surface Remove the four cover screws with a Phillips head screwdriver Carefully lift the bottom cover off of the instrument Ure OS Replace the battery pack the instrument must be powered for the adjustment procedures that follow Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Adjustment Procedures To reinstall the bottom cover following the adjustments perform steps 1 and 4 above in reverse order Figure 2 Removing the Bottom Cover Access the Main Circuit You must access the main circuit board to make adjustments To expose the Board board refer to Figure 3 while performing the following steps 1 Remove the two circuit board mounting screws with a Phillips head screwdriver 2 Lift the top circuit board up and position it to the side Do not disconnect any cables 3 Fold back the insulating shield that separates the top circuit board from the bottom circuit board To reinstall the top circuit board following the adjustments perform steps 1 through 3 above in reverse order Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 THM420 Adjustment Procedures Mounting screws im Lift and position circuit board Fold back shield Ses Figure 3 Exposing the Main Circuit Board Adjustment Procedure To return your instrument to factory calibration perform the following procedure 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to V zi Press the METER SCOPE button to sele
71. following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare instruments for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your power supply meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section List of Adjustments Use the adjustments listed in Table 10 to return PS280 and PS283 power supplies to factory calibration Table 10 PS280 and PS283 Adjustments Independent Mode Adjustments MASTER Voltage Output SLAVE Voltage Output MASTER Current Output SERIES Tracking Mode Adjustments Series Tracking PARALLEL Tracking Mode Adjustments Parallel Tracking 5 V Fixed Output Adjustments 5 V Output Current Limit Overload Indicator Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Test Equipment To ensure accurate adjustments use the recommended or equivalent test equipment specified in Table 6 on page 6 If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements NOTE Before making any adjustment warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Preparation for Adjustment Remove Instrument Cover 14 A The following guidelines apply to all PS280 and PS283 power supply adjust ments W Perform t
72. gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3A OVP SET 7N Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC across the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 2 984 and 3 016 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT Y to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 3 000 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 2 984 and 3 016 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A 10 Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A 11 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Parallel Operation Use the following steps to the check parallel mode accuracy 1 2 3 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10V CURRENT SET 1 5A OVP SET 11V Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Press SHIF
73. in Figure 6 Repeat steps 5 to 8 above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 2 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 3 Setthe DMM to measure 5 amperes DC 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 3 0A OVP SET 38 5 V 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 6 Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the DMM current variation is 0 006 A over the adjustment range 7 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 8 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and 2 2 Q 50 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals See Figure 6 for details 3 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3 0A OVP SET
74. indicator turns off Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode accuracy 1 2 14 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V OVP SET 37V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 40 VDC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 35 950 and 36 050 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 36 00 VDC Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 35 950 and 36 050 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 2 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Current Set Accu
75. jumper Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures 0 C Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a 0 calibration 1 Connect the thermocouple simulator to the T1 probe connector Set the thermocouple simulator and thermometer probe types to K Set the thermocouple simulator to 0 C Adjust VR1 until displayed temperature is between 00 1 and 00 1 Ue des cos ip Disconnect the thermocouple simulator JP1 EE 2 00 2 Front VR3 al VR2 Figure 3 DTM520 Thermometer Disassembly Test Points and Adjustment Locations 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DTM900 and DTM920 Digital Thermometers 070 9853 00 rm a Table of Contents DTM 900 and DTM920 Digital Thermometers 1 Sp cifications iii ee yet re Sin oS Rego eh xe e 2 Performance Verification eee 5 Test Equipment Li ire cen CD og Aon as Boa aa a Mec scs 5 Set Up ui vane sen e CE OE UNE IDEE qa MERO eO AU RUP 6 Verification Procedure 0 00 n 6 DIM900 Test Record iz csse RR Re teg exei 7 DIM920 Test Record 3 4 5 ei a tA eS YR ORE REUS 8 Adjustment Procedures ccccecssccccccncnccsscsceecs 10 List of Adjustments nuusan cece ccc n 10 Test Equipment 0 0 cece cc hh hm n 10
76. mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions Temperature Test 0 09 C 2 0 40 0 C 38 0 100 0 C 102 0 950 09 C 2 C 948 0 952 0 DC Milliampere Test 0 0 uA 10 counts 10pA 1 0 pA 360 0 pA 0 4 10 counts 357 6 pA 362 4 pA 360 0 uA 0 4 10 counts 362 4 uA 357 6 uA 3600 0 uA 0 4 10 counts 3584 6 pA 3615 4 uA 36 00 mA 0 4 10 counts 35 76 mA 36 24 mA 360 00 mA 0 4 10 counts 358 46 mA 361 54 mA Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 25 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM914 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 0 9 80 counts 3559 6 WA 3640 4 uA 360 00 mA 0 9 80 counts 355 96 mA l cu 364 04 mA 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency DC Ampere Test 10 000 A 0 4 10 counts 9 950A Eo 10 050A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz 10 000A 0 9 80 counts 9 830A 10 170A 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 26 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM916 Test Records Procedure performed by Date Serial Number DMM916 Test Record AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 40 796 40 counts 3 5708V 3 62
77. nonsinusoidal signal with crest factor lt 3 Q Resistance Range and Resolution Range Resolution e 4000 0 10 4kQ 10 40 kQ 100 400 kO 100 Q 4MO 1kQ 40MQ 10 KQ Autorange available Accuracy 0 5 of reading 2 counts 40 MQ range is 2 of reading 5 counts at eo jo o lt 60 relative humidity Derate 4 MQ range to 1 of reading 2 counts from 60 to 90 relative humidity 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Specifications Table 2 DMM Specifications Cont 550 560 565 Diode Test Range 0 to 2 V Red input connector is positive o o e Continuity Check Indication Audible tone and graphic of a closed switch displayed when resistance is 50 O e typical Indicators optionally disabled Table 3 Scope Specifications 550 560 565 Modes Autorange Typical Autorange mode positions and sets the vertical and horizontal scales to between 30 and 60 of full screen After 500 ms the process repeats if the signal amplitude or period changes The lower limits of Autorange are 50 mV div and 100 ms div Autorange is the default mode Manual The scope switches to manual operation when any control alters the waveform display Line Test m Will monitor a 45 to 65 Hz power waveform on CH 1 and check for variations in amplitude and frequency Abnormal events such as spikes drop outs and substantial frequency variations will be captured and counted m Automatic print of f
78. or double triggering Table 14 DC Coupled Bandwidth Volts Div 50 kHz Bandwidth TAS 220 TAS 250 Reference Amplitude Minimum Amplitude Bandwidth Bandwidth 1 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 10 MHz 15 MHz 2 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 10 MHz 15 MHz 5 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 10 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 20 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 50 mV 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 100 mV 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 200 mV 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 500 mV 6 divisions 4 2 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 1V 4 divisions 2 8 divisions 20 MHz 50 MHz 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for CH 2 DC Balance To check DC balance accuracy perform the following steps 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 GND In CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL 2 Verify that the oscilloscope trace shift is less than 0 5 divisions when rotating the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control between the 5 mV and 5 V settings 3 Verify that the oscilloscope trace shift is less than two divisions when the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control is changed from the 1 mV to the 2 mV setting 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 above for CH 2 12 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Variable DC Balance To check Variable DC balance accuracy perform the following steps 1 3 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC C
79. output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the rear panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 7 Repeat steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 50 mV 8 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 9 Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 3 Setthe DMM to measure 25 VDC 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 5 1A OVP SET 22 V 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 6 Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 5 000 A 7 Record the DMM voltage V1 8 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 9 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 6 mV 10 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verif
80. outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DMM91X Series Performance Verification 16 DC Milliampere Check AC Milliampere Check DC Ampere Check 4 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Volts Peak Hold Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Set the calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the DC milliampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to mA 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter uA mA and COM input connectors 3 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the DC Milliampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the AC milliampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to mA z 2 Push the BLUE button to select AC mode 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter uA mA and COM input connectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the AC Milliampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimete
81. paralleled by 100 pF Current DC Ranges 400 mA 8A AC Ranges 400 mA 8A DC Accuracy 400 mA Range 0 6 of reading 3 counts 8 A Range 0 8 of reading 4 counts AC Accuracy 40 to 1 kHz 400 mA Range 1 8 of reading 5 counts 8 A Range 1 8 of reading 5 counts Overload protection mA Connector 500 mA 350 V fast blow fuse A Connector 15 A 600 V fast blow fuse Resistance Ranges 400 O 4 kO 40 kO 400 kQ 4 MO 40 MQ Accuracy By range 400 Q 0 4 of reading 4 counts 4kQ 40 kO 400 kO 0 4 of reading 2 counts 4MQ 0 6 of reading 3 counts 40 MQ 1 5 of reading 5 counts Frequency Ranges 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 THM420 Specifications Table 2 Measurement Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Accuracy By range 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 0 1 of reading 4 counts 1MHz 0 5 of reading 4 counts Sensitivity 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 40 MVams 100 kHz 1 MHz 400 mVams Lowest Measurable Frequency 10Hz Continuity Diode Test Test Current 1 0 mA Test Voltage 5 V maximum Table 3 Waveform Display Characteristics Characteristic Description Display Region 8 Horizontal divisions and 4 vertical divisions 16 dots division Vertical Voltage Input Bandwidth 20 mV to 1 V div DC to 5 MHz 2 V to 200 V div DC to 3 MHz Current Inputs Rise Time Limits 400 mA Connector 2500 ns 8 A Connector gt us
82. parts of equipment telecommunications electronics Pollution Degree 2 Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be present Table 4 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 7596 relative humidity Nonoperating 20 C to 460 C 21 to 140 F 8096 relative humidity Temperature Coefficient 0 2 x specified accuracy per C at 18 C or 228 C Maximum Altitude Operating 2 000 m 6 562 ft 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter performs as warranted If an instrument fails any of the checks it needs adjustment and or repair The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C 64 to 82 F ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 75 m The instrument warms up in the ambient environment for at least one hour m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The DCM910 performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks AC Current Check DC Current Check Frequency Check Test Equipment The performance verification proce
83. product installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Products These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service General Safety Summary Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A AN m DANGER Protective Ground ATTENTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Manual Insulated Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service V A D HG Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock
84. set the DMM to Delta mode 4 000 count mode only Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 kQ 3 570 KQ 3 630 KQ 36 00 kQ 0 8 1 count 35 70 kQ 36 30 KQ 360 0 KQ 0 8 1 count 357 0kQ 363 0 KQ 3 600 MQ 0 8 1 count 3 570 MQ D ul 3 630 MQ 1 4000 count mode only 2 Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6kQ Continuity Test 0 0 0 Beeper sounds 150 Q Beeper does not sound EE Multimeter Leads Shorted Beeper sounds Diode Test 0 5 V 0 400 V 0 600 V 24 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM650 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Capacitance Testi 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 1 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 646 UF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 uF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF3 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF3 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Set the DMM to Delta mode Delta mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions Temperature Test 0 09 C 2 0 40 0 C 38 0 100 0 C 102 0 950
85. the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 4 through 10 above Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals and connect them to the rear panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode output accuracy 1 With the power supply set to OUT 2 press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Perform steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 43 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 44 4 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 50 mV 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off 6 Ensure that the power supply
86. the DMM reads 6 00 VDC 8 Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout reads between 5 950 and 6 050 V 9 Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V 10 Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 3 terminals 11 Verify that the DMM reads between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC 12 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 2 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V OVP SET 22 V 3 Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 50 VDC across the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 39 930 and 40 070 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 40 000 VDC Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 19 965 and 20 035 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage t
87. the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC NOTE For proper current calibration use quality test leads with good low temperature thermal characteristics Also ensure that good connections exist between the DMM and the Power Supply Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 59 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures 60 Instrument front Figure 13 VR501 VR601 Adjustment Location 13 14 15 16 17 18 Enter the DMM reading on the keypad in amperes then press lt Verify that the power supply readout displays cL2F indicating that the current offset calibration is complete Set the DMM to the 10 A range and press on the power supply Verify that the power supply readout displays cL21 indicating current full scale calibration Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press lt Verify that the power supply readout displays cL2F indicating that the current full scale calibration is complete Disconnect the DMM from the power supply Press on the power supply and verify that the readout displays cL30 indicating overvoltage protection offset calibration Wait 10 seconds and verify that the readout displays cL31 indicating that the overvoltage protection full scale calibration is running Wait another 10 seconds for the readout to return to normal The c
88. the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must open the multimeter case to access the internal adjustments Use the following procedure to open the case 1 Lay the meter face down on a flat work surface that cannot damage the multimeter face Remove the three screws from the case bottom using a standard Philips head screwdriver Gently lift the end of the case bottom at the end opposite from the display Then lift the end nearest the display until it unsnaps from the case top See Figure 2 for details To reassemble the multimeter following the adjustments see page 39 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 33 DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures Case bottom Remove screws 3 y A ASA Figure 2 Opening the Meter Case 34 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustments Part 1 The procedures within this section use the adjustments accessible with the back case removed from the multimeter VR 4 DMM914 and DMM916 Case top Figure 3 Adjustment locations 1 DC Volts Perform the following steps to adjust the DC voltage calibration 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Set the calibrator to output 3 0000 VDC Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V OQ4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VR5 until the display shows 2 9999 to 3 0001 VDC Turn the calibrator output off Disconnec
89. the calibrator to each of the values in the DC Volts Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter DC Millivolts Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC millivolt measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to mV Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V O4 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the DC Millivolt Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification 12 AC DC Volts Check Frequency Check Duty Factor Check DMM850 and DMM870 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the AC DC voltage measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to AC DC 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 3 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the AC DC Volts Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the frequency measurement accuracy 1 S
90. the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the frequency measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to Hz 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 3 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Frequency Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the duty factor measurement accuracy Set the multimeter dial to Hz 2 Push the BLUE button to select duty factor 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Duty Factor Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter CQ Check Perform the following steps to verify the resistance measurement accuracy in Q mode 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Q Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM input connectors Set the ca
91. the power supply OUTPUT 3 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V OVP SET 37V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 100 VDC across the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 E terminals Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 71 900 and 72 100 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 72 000 VDC Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 35 950 and 36 050 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 1498 and 0 2500 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT
92. the sampling mode to SAMPLE NORMAL for the THM571 then turn the menus off 2 Usea patch cord to short the COM and CH 1 inputs as shown in Figure 5 Patch cord COM CH1 uL Figure 5 Trace Shift Test Setup 3 Press the THM500 series instrument POSITION SCALE button until the readout in the lower right corner shows SCALE then use the A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to 5 mV div 4 Press the THM500 series instrument POSITION SCALE button until the readout in the lower right corner shows POS then use the A and Y buttons to position the trace vertically at the center of the display 5 Verify that as you remove the shorting patch cord the waveform does not move more than three pixels vertically 6 If your THMS500 series instrument is equipped with two channels repeat steps 2 through 5 above for CH 2 7 Disconnect the test setup The following check verifies the time base accuracy 1 Connect the time mark generator marker output to the THM500 series instrument CH 1 and COM inputs using a 50 Q termination as shown in Figure 6 Assure that the ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument 2 If necessary press the THM500 series instrument SELECT button to point to CH 1 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification 50 Q cable Le 50 Q termination lt BNC to dual ba
93. the scale of the selected 8 waveform Each screen memory stores the exact information displayed on screen 8 snapshot Table 4 General Specifications Real Time Display System Display Type Super Twisted Liquid Crystal Display Size Width 120 mm 4 72 inch e Display Resolution Contrast Backlight Waveform Graticule Power Source Batteries Battery Life Typical Battery Saver Memory Retention Time Height 60 mm 2 36 inch 256 pixels horizontal x 128 pixels vertical o o e User adjustable o o Electroluminescent e 8 divisions vertical x 10 divisions horizontal Default crosshair grid or none 1 vertical division 2 15 pixels 1 horizontal division 25 pixels Six AA cells 9 V nominal fe le e RAYOVACO Alkaline MAXIMUM batteries Battery life extended when used 4 5 hours continuous operation with alkaline cells backlight off Tested using e x l intermittently User adjusted battery saver feature turns the instrument off after five minutes and the backlight off after one minute Memory hold up time following battery removal eight minutes minimum three e jo o hours typical Memory retention extended weeks or months if discharged batteries remain installed Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Specifications Table 4 General Specifications Cont 550 560 565 Environmental Temperature Operating 0 to 50 C 32
94. this section do not verify performance To confirm that your multimeter meets factory specifications perform the procedures in the Perfor mance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in Table 9 to return DMM800 Series multimeters to factory calibration Table 9 DMM800 Series Adjustments Adjustments Part 1 DC Volts AC Volts Capacitance Temperature DMM850 and DMM870 DC Milliamperes DC Amperes Adjustments Part 2 AC Response Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures Test Equipment The test equipment listed in Table 8 on page 9 is a complete list of equipment needed for the adjustment procedures These procedures assume that the test equipment is operating within tolerance Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DMM800 Series adjustments Open the Meter Case Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less Warm up the multimeter for at least 15 minutes Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must open the multimeter case to access the internal adjustments Use the following procedure to open the case 1 Lay the meter face down on a flat work surface that cannot damage th
95. to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 2 for details m Power suppl Electronic load Digital multimeter iu Figure 7 Constant Voltage Load Test Setup Set the DMM to measure 25 VDC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 2 55 A OVP SET 22 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 2 500 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Record the DMM voltage V1 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 6 mV Press OUTPUT OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the OUTPUT 1 terminals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configura tion and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect
96. 0 multimeters to factory calibration Table 10 DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustments AC Current AC Voltage Resistance Continuity The test equipment listed in Table 6 on page 6 is a complete list of equipment needed for the adjustment procedures These procedures assume that all test equipment is operating within tolerance Detailed operating instructions for test equipment are not given in this procedure If you need operating information refer to the instruction manual of the test equipment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustment Procedures Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DCM300 amp DCM320 adjustments Open the Meter Case Adjustment Procedure A AC Current Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less Before making any adjustment warm up the multimeter for 20 minutes Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must open the meter case to gain access to the internal adjustments 1 2 Lay the meter face down on a flat work surface Remove the two screws from the meter bottom with a Phillips head screwdriver Gently lift the end of the bottom cover until it unsnaps from the top cover
97. 0 966 V 1 034 V 1 000 V 60 Hz 2 0 14 counts 0 966 V 1 034 V 1 4000 count mode only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 0 01 10 counts 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V 0 15 10 counts 0 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if using the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Select the sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Duty Factor Test 50 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 90 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 10 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 9 9 10 1 squarewave Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 23 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM650 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Q Test 0 0000 Q1 0 4 10 counts 0 1000 Q 0 1000 Q 360 00 Q1 0 8 10 counts 357 02 Q 362 98 Q 3 6000 kO 0 4 10 counts 3 5846 kO 3 6154 kO 36 000 kO 0 4 10 counts 35 846 kQ 36 154 kO 360 00 kO 30 496 10 counts 358 46 kQ 361 54 kO 3 6000 MO 0 8 10 counts 3 5702 3 6298 MQ 20 00 MO 5 10 counts 18 90 M 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and
98. 0 counts 356 00 V 364 00 V 1 kHz 2 5 40 counts 350 60 V 369 40 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 1 0 40 counts 738 5 V 761 5 V 1 Verify proper DMM range 5 display digits use manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits The upper display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 2 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 2 10 counts 3 5918 V 3 6082 V 3 6000 V 0 2 10 counts 3 6082 V 3 5918 V 36 000 V 0 2 10 counts 35 918 V 36 082 V 360 00 V 0 2 10 counts 359 18 V 360 82 V 1000 0 V 0 2 10 counts 997 0 V 1003 0 V 1000 0 V 0 2 10 counts 1003 0 V 997 0 V DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 0 10 mV 0 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 39 82 mV 40 18 mV 360 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 359 18 mV 360 82 mV 360 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 360 82 mV 359 18 mV 18 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM912 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC DC Volts Test 1 000 V 2 2 14 counts 0 964 V 1 036 V 1 000 V nd 2 2 14 counts 0 964 V 1 000 V 60Hz 22 14 counts 0 964 Y 1 4000 count a only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz y 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts
99. 00 series instrument display and verify that its absolute value falls within the range listed in the fourth column Table 10 Vertical Accuracy Test Settings THM500 Series DC Voltage Source DC Voltage Source Instrument AV Readout Vertical Scale First Cursor Second Cursor Ignore Polarity 5 mV div 15mV 15 mV 27 5mV to 32 5 mV 100mV div 300 mV 4300 mV 552 mV to 648 mV 1 V div 3V HV 5 52 V to 6 48 V 10V div 30V 30 V 55 2 V to 64 8 V 100V div 300 V 300 V 552 V to 648 V 4 If your THM500 series instrument is equipped with two channels repeat Step 3 all tests above on CH 2 5 Disconnect the test setup Analog Bandwidth The following check assesses the analog bandwidth 1 Connect the leveled sine wave generator output to the THM500 series instrument CH 1 and COM inputs Use a 50 Q termination as shown in Figure 8 Assure that the ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument 2 Press the THM500 series instrument CURSORS TRIGGER button until the readout shows TRIG in the lower right corner then use the A and Y buttons to set the trigger level to center screen Leveled Sine Wave generator 50 Q cable 50 Q termination I BNC to dual banana cable Figure 8 Analog Bandwidth Test Setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 THM500 Series Performance Verification 3
100. 06 VR204 Q E VR103 VC205 VR102 amp VR203 T VR202 Instrument front o Figure 8 Main Board Viewed from the Instrument Top Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 29 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 30 DC Balance Variable DC Balance Channel 2 Inverted Balance and Position Center Use the following procedure to adjust the DC balance 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 VERTICAL VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 GND In On the oscilloscope Main board adjust VR101 VR201 for a minimal trace shift when switching the front panel CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control between 5 mV and 10 mV See Figure 10 for the adjustment locations Verify that the trace shift is less than 0 5 divisions for each CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV step between 5 mV and 5 V On the Main board adjust VR104 VR204 for minimal trace shift when switching the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control between 2 mV and 10 mV See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations Verify that the trace shift is less than two divisions when switching the VOLTS DIV control between 1 mV and 2 mV Set the VERTICAL MODE to CH2 and repeat steps 2 through 5 for CH 2 Use the following procedure to adjust the variable DC balance 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 GND In On the Main board adjust
101. 09 C 2 C 948 0 952 0 DC Milliampere Test 0 0 uA 10 counts 10pA 1 0 pA 360 0 pA 0 4 10 counts 357 6 pA 362 4 pA 360 0 uA 0 4 10 counts 362 4 uA 357 6 uA 3600 0 uA 0 4 10 counts 3584 6 pA 3615 4 uA 36 00 mA 0 4 10 counts 35 76 mA 36 24 mA 360 00 mA 0 4 10 counts 358 46 mA 361 54 mA Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 25 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM650 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 0 9 80 counts 3559 6 WA 3640 4 uA 360 00 mA 0 9 80 counts 355 96 mA l cu 364 04 mA 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency DC Ampere Test 10 000 A 0 4 10 counts 9 950A Eo 10 050A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz 10 000A 0 9 80 counts 9 830A 10 170A 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 26 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM870 Test Records Procedure performed by Date Serial Number DMM870 Test Record AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 40 796 40 counts 3 5708V 3 6292 V 1 5 40 counts _ 3 5420 V 3 6580 V 2 5 40 counts 3 5060 V 3 6940 V 36 000 V 500 Hz 1 5 40 counts 35420V 36 580 V 10 kHz 2 5 40 counts 35 060 V 36 940 V 360 00 V 1 5 40 counts 35420V 365 80 V 2 5 40
102. 13 62 inch 10 kg 22 lbs Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that PS2520 PS2520G PS2521 or PS2521G power supplies perform as warranted Implement the performance verification procedures whenever the accuracy or function of your power supply 1s in question The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 86 F ambient environ ment m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes W The cabinet remains installed on the instrument The PS2520 series performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks Basic Function Voltage Set Accuracy Current Set Accuracy Overvoltage Protection OVP Accuracy Constant Voltage Load Accuracy Constant Voltage Source Accuracy Constant Voltage Ripple and Noise Accuracy Constant Current Load and Overcurrent Protection OCP Accuracy Constant Current Source Accuracy There are two separate performance verification procedures for the PS2520 2520G and PS2521 2521G series instruments The PS2520 2520G procedures begin on page 9 the PS2521 2521G procedures begin on page 32 Use the procedure appropriate to your instrument You will find the recomm
103. 25 mVp p Crosstalk Between The following check assesses the crosstalk between oscilloscope channels If Oscilloscope Channels your instrument has only one channel THMS550 do not perform this test 1 Connect the leveled sine wave generator output to the THM500 series instrument CH and COM inputs Use a 50 Q termination as shown in Figure 10 Assure that the ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument 2 Connect the THM500 series instrument CH 2 input to the COM input using a patch cord as shown in Figure 10 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 THM500 Series Performance Verification 22 Leveled Sine 50 Q cable Patch cord 50 Q termination BNC to dual banana cable Wave generator Figure 10 Crosstalk Between Scope Channels Test Setup On the THM500 series instrument press the POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows SCALE in the lower right corner Use the A and Y buttons to set the CH 1 vertical scale to 500 mV div and the and buttons to set the time base to 200 pis div Use the THM500 series instrument menus to set the sampling mode to SPIKE DETECT then remove the menus from the display Adjust the leveled sine wave generator to display five divisions peak to peak at 5 MHz NOTE The 5 MHz waveform is aliased and appears untriggered Press the
104. 3 10 counts 358 0 uA 362 0 uA 360 0 pA 0 3 10 counts 362 0 uA 358 0 uA 3600 0 uA 0 3 10 counts 3588 2 uA 3611 8 pA 36 00 mA 0 3 10 counts 35 80 mA 36 20 mA 360 00 mA 0 3 10 counts 358 82 mA 361 18 mA 30 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM670 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 0 9 80 counts 3559 6 uA 3640 4 uA 360 00 mA 0 9 80 counts 355 96 mA Eo 364 04 mA 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency DC Ampere Test 10 000 A 40 395 10 counts 9 960A E 10 040 A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz 10 000 A 0 9 80 counts 9 830A 10 170 A 1 The upper display readout is 60 Hz 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 31 DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments 32 This section contains procedures to adjust DMM830 DMM850 and DMM870 multimeters Perform these procedures once a year or if the Performance Verification procedure indicates the need for calibration In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments Wm A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in
105. 3 4 Close the case snapping the case halves together Reinstall the three screws Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 39 DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures 40 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DMM 912 914 and 916 Digital Multimeters 070 9851 00 AA ni Table of Contents DMM 12 914 and 916 Digital Multimeters 1 Sp cifications 4 exelente ye y ter eee hrs ble aw er E 3 Performance Verification eee 8 Test Equipment Li cen CD og Aon as T ea Soc iOS 9 Set Ups coo saute en wp P OE BE RUNE BO due hid EO ede rRNA 10 Verification Procedure o e enrere a r ra en 11 DMM 912 Test Records sirdon ata SAS tain A 18 DMM914 Test Records saroia a e e a AE A E E E E E RA 22 DMM916 Test Records si e cece E T E R E 27 Adjustment Procedures esesesscosocsesoesecseseseseoseoe 32 List of Adjustments orenean e e cece E a n 32 Test Equipment escep sa ee e Re er Rr III e eds 33 Preparation for Adjustment o oooooooocooorr eh 33 Adjustments Part 1 sire ete eee e RR REESE re eds 35 Adjustments Part 2 llis n 38 Reassembling the Multimeter ooooooooocorrorrrr eee 39 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service A 04 DMM912 914 and 916 Digital Multimeters The
106. 300 V 293 5 to 306 5 600 V 500 V 485 to 515 4 Setthe calibrator output to a safe voltage less than 20 V and disconnect the THM500 series instrument from the calibrator 5 Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 THM500 Series Performance Verification Resistance Accuracy The following check verifies resistance accuracy 1 Set the THM500 series instrument to METER mode displaying Q Connect the THM500 series instrument to the resistance source as shown in Figure 3 50 O cable Fl BNC to dual banana cable gt Resistance source THM5xx BNC to dual banana cable Figure 3 Resistance Accuracy Test Setup 2 For each row of Table 9 use the A and Y buttons to set the THM500 series instrument to the range specified in the first column then set the resistance source to the resistance specified in the second column Verify that the THM500 series instrument readout is within the range listed in the third column Table 9 Resistance Accuracy Test Limits Instrument Range Resistance Source Instrument Readout 400 Q 100 Q 99 3 to 100 7 4kQ 1kQ 0 993 to 1 007 40 KQ 10kQ 9 93 to 10 07 400 kO 100 KQ 99 3 to 100 7 4MQ 1MQ 0 993 to 1 007 3 Disconnect the test setup 4 If you will not be performing the Oscilloscope Verification procedures use the menus to return the THM500 series instrument to factory default settings by select
107. 314 Storage Oscilloscope 070 1824 00 335 Oscilloscope 070 1943 01 336 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 4421 00 2201 Portable Oscilloscope 070 7189 00 2205 Oscilloscope 070 6716 00 2211 Oscilloscope 070 7234 00 2214 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 7783 00 2220 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 5302 00 2221A Oscilloscope 8010100 to B019999 070 8157 01 B020000 and above 070 8549 00 2225 Oscilloscope 070 6299 00 2230 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 4999 00 2232 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 8010100 to B029999 070 7067 01 8030000 and above 070 8548 00 2235 AN US M 488 Oscilloscope 070 4977 00 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Service Reference Table i Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Service Manuals Cont Product Tektronix Part Number 2245 Portable Oscilloscope 070 6276 00 2245A Portable Oscilloscope B010100 to B015999 070 6557 00 B016000 and above 070 7672 00 2246A Portable Oscilloscope 070 6555 00 2246 1Y 2R 2246 Mod A 070 7062 00 2247A Portable Oscilloscope 070 6367 00 2252 Portable Oscilloscope 070 7838 01 2335 Oscilloscope 070 4116 00 2336 Oscilloscope 070 4118 00 2336YA Oscilloscope 070 5011 00 2337 Oscilloscope 070 4120 00 TAS 455 465 Oscilloscope 070 8524 02 TAS 465 Oscilloscope 070 9403 00 TAS 475 485 Oscilloscope B010100 to B020099 070 8878 01 B020100 and above 070 9404 00 TDS 210 Oscilloscope 070 9693 00 TDS 220 TD
108. 3s 5 Press SHIFT gt STORE 2 to store the above values in the memory 02 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 4 for memory location 02 6 Press SHIFT RECALL then enter 1 2 7 Press RECALL LAST verify that the readouts display the data stored in the memory 02 location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press RECALL LAST again verify that the readouts now display the data stored in the memory 01 location Press RECALL NEXT verify that the readouts display the data stored in the memory 02 location Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Press AUTO SEQ ON OFF and verify that the AUTO indicator lights up on the display Verify that the front panel readouts alternately display the memory 01 and memory 02 setups from steps 2 and 4 above every three seconds Press AUTO SEQ ON OFF and OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the AUTO and OUT indicators turn off Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 1 00 V Press VOLTS V7 and verify that as you attempt to decrease the voltage below 0 00 V Err 018 appears on the CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts The voltage should decrease in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press VOLTS ZA and verify that as you attempt to increase the voltage past 21 00 V
109. 5 or better 300 mV 3 V 30 V 300 V 500 V with accuracy of 0 5 or better 10 Q 100 Q 1 KQ 10 kQ 100 kQ 1 MQ with accuracy of 0 125 or better Tektronix 011 0049 xx Tektronix 012 0057 xx he A Tektronix 012 1413 xx Tektronix 012 1450 xx Pee a T Tektronix 103 0090 xx Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification Functional Test The following steps verify basic instrument operation and reset the THM500 series instruments to factory default settings 1 Install fully charged batteries or use the THMCOM1 Communications Adapter or the THM5AC Power Adapter optional accessories to provide power Press the ON OFF button to turn the THM500 series instrument on Press the MENU ON OFF button to display the menus NOTE The THM575 can display the menus in more than one language The language selections are located in the Utility menu Select UTILITY STATUS DISPLAY from the menus Press the SELECT button Verify that the correct THM500 series instrument model number is displayed Use the menus to select RESET ALL It will appear underlined Press the SELECT button and wait for the confirmation message then press the SELECT button again Verify that the instrument returns to its power on mode m THM550 THM560 THM565 THM570 or THM570U instruments return to METER mode m THM571 THM575 or THM570U Option 3K instruments return to a banner screen
110. 6 uF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 uF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF3 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF3 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 2 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Set the DMM to Delta mode Delta mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions 20 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM630 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum DC Milliampere Test 0 0 pA 10 counts 1 0 pA 1 0 pA 360 0 pA 0 5 10 counts 357 2 uA 362 8 uA 360 0 uA 0 5 10 counts 362 8 uA 357 2 pA 3600 0 uA 0 5 10 counts 3581 0 pA 3619 0 A 36 00 mA 0 5 10 counts 35 72 mA 36 28 mA 360 00 mA 0 5 10 counts 358 10 mA 361 90 mA AC Milliampere Test 60 Hz 3600 0 pA 1 2 80 counts 3548 8 pA 3651 2 pA 360 00 mA 1 2 80 counts 354 88 mA Le 365 12 mA DC Ampere Test 10 000A 0 5 10 counts 9 940 A 10 060 A AC Ampere Test 60 Hz 10 000 A 1 2 80 counts 19 800 A 10 200 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM850 Test Records Procedure performed by Date Serial Number DMM850 Test Record
111. 7 V 1 033V 1 4000 count mode only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 0 01 10 counts 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz 1Vp p 0 01 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00kHz1 1Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V 0 15 10 counts 0 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if using the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Select the sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Duty Factor Test 50 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 90 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 squarewave 10 0 5V 1 kHz 0 15 9 9 10 1 squarewave 28 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM916 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Q Test 0 0000 Q1 0 3 10 counts 0 1000 Q 0 1000 Q 360 00 Q1 0 6 10 counts 357 74 Q 362 26 Q 3 6000 KQ 0 3 10 counts 3 5882 kO 3 6118 KQ 36 000 KQ 0 3 10 counts 35 882 kO 36 118 KQ 360 00 KQ 0 3 10 counts 358 82 kO 361 18 KQ 3 6000 MQ 0 6 10 counts 3 5774 3 6226 MQ 20 00 MQ 5 10 counts 18 90 M 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and set the DMM to Delta mode 2 Verify the DMM is in the 4 000 count
112. 7N 4 Repeat steps 6 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above This concludes the PS2520 and PS2520G performance verification procedures Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 31 PS2520 Series Performance Verification PS2521 and PS2521G Checks 32 Basic Function To verify the performance and function of the PS2521 and PS2521G power supplies implement the following checks in sequential order To verify the performance and function of the PS2520 and PS2520G power supplies see page 9 The test equipment for all verification procedures is listed on page 8 NOTE To clear a memory location enter 0 as the VOLTS SET and CURRENT SET values then save the 0 values to the desired memory location For a list of error code descriptions see your User manual Complete the following procedures to verify basic instrument function Outputs 1 2 and 3 Use the following steps to verify OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 3 basic function 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 2 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10 V CURRENT SET 1A OVP SET 22 V DELAY 3s 3 Press SHIFT gt STORE 1 to store the above values in the memory 01 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 2 for memory location 01 4 Resetthe power supply as follows VOLTS SET 11V CURRENT SET 11A OVP SET 22 V DELAY
113. 92 V 1 5 40 counts _ 3 5420 V 3 6580 V 2 5 40 counts 3 5060 V 3 6940 V 36 000 V 500 Hz 1 5 40 counts 35420V 36 580 V 10 kHz 2 5 40 counts 35 060 V 36 940 V 360 00 V 1 5 40 counts 35420V 365 80 V 2 5 40 counts 350 60 V 369 40 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 0 7 40 counts 740 7 V 759 3V 1 Verify the proper DMM range 5 display digits use the manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits 2 Theupper display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 06 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 06 10 counts 3 5969 V 3 6031 V 3 6000 V 0 06 10 counts 3 6031V 3 5969 V 36 000 V 0 06 10 counts 35 969 V 36 031 V 360 00 V 0 06 10 counts 359 69 V 360 31 V 1000 0 V 0 06 10 counts 998 4 V 1001 6 V 1000 0 V 0 06 10 counts 1001 6V 998 4 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 27 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM916 Test Record Cont Test Input DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 0 10 mV 0 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 39 88 mV 40 12 mV 360 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 359 69 mV 360 31 mV 360 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 360 31 mV 359 69 mV AC DC Volts Test 1 000 V 1 9 14 counts 1 033 V 1 000 V DC 1 9 14 counts 0 967 V 1 033V 1 000 V 60 Hz 1 9 14 counts 0 96
114. AS 200 Series Characteristic Description Dimensions 32 7 cm x 16 2 cm x 46 3 cm 12 9 inch x 6 38 inch x 18 2 inch Weight 7 0 kg 15 4 lbs Operating Voltages 100 V 120 V 220 V 240 V 10 variation from selector range permitted Line Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Power Consumption 70 VA Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the TAS 220 and TAS 250 oscilloscopes perform as warranted Verify instrument performance whenever the accuracy or function of your instrument is in question The procedures are organized into four sections Vertical Check Horizontal Check Trigger Check and Cursor Check The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 20 to 30 C ambient environment m The oscilloscope warms up for at least 20 minutes m The cabinet remains installed on the oscilloscope Table 11 lists the equipment needed to do the performance verification proce dures The TAS 200 series performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 10 Table 10 Performance Verification Checks Vertical Check DC Gain Accuracy DC Coupled Bandwidth DC Balance Variable DC Balance CH 2 Inverted Balance Horizontal Check Time Base Accuracy Trigger Check Trig
115. Benchtop Instruments Basic Service A Cc l Preface This manual contains service information for a wide range of handheld and benchtop products Each section covers a product or related series of products and includes the following information W A product description that details instrument functions capabilities and recommended uses m A front panel illustration m A set of electrical mechanical environmental and physical specifications W A performance verification procedure to ensure the instrument meets specifications W An adjustment procedure to return the instrument to factory calibration not included for all instruments The information contained in this manual is current at the date of publication and is typical or suggested not guaranteed Since manual updates occur at approxi mately six month intervals information may be incomplete or missing in some versions Some instruments have optional service information available under separate cover This manual does not duplicate information from optional service manuals Refer to the optional accessories list in your user manual for Tektronix part numbers of optional service manuals A list of Handheld and Benchtop instruments manuals can also be found on Page 1 NOTE This manual provides the necessary service information to verify that your instrument is working properly Should you have service related questions not covered in either t
116. DC 1000 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 A 5m oR Set the clamp meter to the DC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the DC current calibrator to 400 A Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Press the clamp meter DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the display Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR6 until the display reads 400 Remove the clamp meter from the coil To adjust the AC 400 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 390 A at 400 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Adjustment Procedures Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR8 until the display reads 396 0 To keep the meter on the lower range it may be necessary to cycle the calibrator output off and on Remove the clamp meter from the coil AC 1000 A Range To adjust the AC 1000 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of AC current calibrator to 400 A at 400 Hz Posit
117. DTM900 thermometer has three screws the DTM920 thermometer has four and gently lift the circuit board out of the case Remove the rubber keypad from the case Lay the circuit board face up Place the rubber keypad on the circuit board so it can be used to operate the thermometer To reassemble the thermometer following the adjustments perform steps 3 through 7 above in reverse order Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures DTM900 Adjustment Procedure This section describes how to adjust the DTM900 thermometer To properly adjust the thermometer perform the following steps in sequential order 1 Open the thermometer as described in the previous section Turn on the thermometer and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes Connect the thermocouple simulator to the probe connector Set the simulator probe type to K E T3 For each row in Table 7 set the thermometer and simulator as shown then adjust the specified test point until the displayed temperature is within the proper limits Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment points Table 7 DTM900 Adjustment Procedures Thermometer Setting Simulator Setting C F Temperature Test Point Temperature Limits C 0 1 0 C VR1 00 1 and 00 1 F 1 1000 C VR3 1831 and 1833 C 1 1000 C VR5 999 and 1001 C 0 1 190 C VR2 189 9 and 190 1 F 0 1 0 C VR4 31 9 and 32 1 C 1 1000 C VR3 999 an
118. F 400 nF 4 pF 40 uF 400 pF 4 mF 40 mF Accuracy 96 10 count 4 nF to 4 uF 1 delta mode 40 uF to 40 mF 3 Frequency4 Ranges 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz 2 MHz Accuracy 10 count 400 Hz to 400 kHz 0 01 2 MHz 0 15 Sensitivity 0 5 Vp p Duty factor Accuracy 0 1 0 05 per kHz for 5 V input Range 15 Hz to 10 kHz 10 to 90 duty factor Temperature Range 50 to 4980 C Accuracy 2 C Thermocouple type K Peak measurements Accuracy DC volts 5 40 counts of the peak value of a single 1 ms pulse 1 Divide counts by 10 in 4000 count mode 2 750 V 40 MQ LV range unspecified 3 4000 count mode only Upper display readout is limited to 10 kHz with reduced accuracy 5 gt 10 range 4 V range gt 1 V 6 35 range Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DMMS800 Series Specifications Table 4 Physical Characteristics Characteristic Description Dimensions Without holster 32 mm x 86 mm x 185 mm H x W x D Weight With battery 370 g 13 oz With battery and holster 600 g 21 2 02 Table 5 Environmental Characteristic Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 0 to 50 C Nonoperating storage 20 to 460 C Humidity Operating lt 80 Altitude Operating 2 222 m 7290 ft Nonoperating 12 300 m 40354 ft Vibration Operating 2 66 gnus 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minutes each Nonoperating 3 48 gnus 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minute
119. H 1 CH 2 GND In CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV Verify that the oscilloscope trace shift is less than one division between the fully clockwise and the fully counterclockwise positions of the CH 1 VARIABLE control Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for CH 2 CH 2 Inverted Balance To check CH 2 Inverted balance accuracy perform the following steps 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CH2 CH2 GND In Position the oscilloscope trace on the center horizontal graticule line using the CH 2 POSITION control Verify that there is minimal trace shift X1 divisions on the TAS 200 series instrument when switching the CH 2 INVERT button in and out Set the oscilloscope CH 2 INVERT button to the out position Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Horizontal Check 14 Time Base Accuracy The following checks verify the horizontal accuracy of your oscilloscope To check time base accuracy perform the following steps 1 Use the 50 Q precision coaxial cable to connect the output of the time mark generator to the 50 termination then connect the 50 Q termination to the TAS 200 series instrument CH 1 input See Figure 4 below Time Mark Generator Precision cable 50 Q Termination Figure 4 Timing Check Setup 2 Setupthe oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 AC DC DC CH 1 VOLTS DIV 0 5 V C
120. H 1 GND Out release HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 us TRIGGER MODE AUTO TRIGGER COUPLING DC 3 Setup the time mark generator to produce 0 1 us markers 4 Center the time marks vertically on the oscilloscope display 5 Position the rising edge of the second time mark to the second vertical graticule line of the oscilloscope display 6 Verify that the time mark to graticule accuracy over the center eight divisions is within the limits shown for each HORIZONTAL SEC DIV setting listed in Table 15 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Table 15 Standard Time Base Accuracies HORIZONTAL Time Marker Time Mark to Graticule Accuracy SEC DIV Setting Over Center 8 Divisions lus 0 1 us 0 24 division us 0 2 us 0 24 division 5 uS 0 5 us 0 24 division 1 us 1 us 0 24 division 2 us 2 us 0 24 division 5 us 5 us 0 24 division 10 us 10 us 0 24 division 20 us 20 us 0 24 division 50 us 50 us 0 24 division 1 ms 0 1 ms 0 24 division 2 ms 0 2 ms 0 24 division 5 ms 0 5 ms 0 24 division 1 ms 1 ms 0 24 division 2ms 2ms 0 24 division 5 ms 5 ms 0 24 division 7 Setthe oscilloscope HORIZONTAL SEC DIV control to either 5 us TAS 220 or 1 us TAS 250 8 Setthe oscilloscope HORIZONTAL X10 MAG push switch to the on position in 9 Setthe time mark generator to 20 ns 10 Position the edge of the second time mark to the second vertical g
121. INTENSITY control clockwise Verify that the trace becomes brighter Rotate the INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise the trace should disappear Focus and Astigmatism Use the following procedure to adjust the display focus and astigmatism 1 Setthe front panel FOCUS control to midrange then adjust VR602 on the Power and High Voltage board to obtain the best focus See Figure 7 for the adjustment location 2 Setthe front panel HORIZONTAL X Y push switch to the in position Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 27 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 3 Rotate the front panel HORIZONTAL POSITION control to move the dot to the display center Rotate the INTENSITY control to give the dot a sharp edge 4 Adjust VR604 on the Power and High Voltage board and the oscilloscope front panel FOCUS control until the dot becomes circular See Figure 7 for the adjustment location 5 Setthe front panel HORIZONTAL X Y push switch to the out position 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for best performance 28 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Vertical Adjustments To locate the adjustments for the following procedures refer to Figures 8 9 and 10 The Main board occupies the bottom right side of the instrument VR303 amp VR 112 VR108 amp E VR110 VR109 G VR107 amp VC106 VC206 VEO VR207 amp VR104 VR213 O VR100 O amp VC105 VR2
122. Maximum input voltage Maximum floating voltage Maximum input current Maximum open circuit voltage Overload protection pA mA connector A connector The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment at less than 75 relative humidity m The batteries are adequately charged the battery indicator does not display NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Description 43 4 or 33 40 40 000 or 4 000 1 time sec 40 000 count 4 times sec 4 000 count 20 times sec Automatic OL is displayed Battery indicator User selectable default 15 minutes One 9 V dry cell battery 1000 V 750 V AC CAT II between V and COM 1000 V 750 V AC CAT II between any terminal and earth ground 400 mA between uA mA and COM 10 A continuous between A and COM 20 A for 30 seconds Current inputs 600 V between A and COM and between A mA and COM 1A 600 V fastblow fuse 15 A 600 V fastblow fuse V connector MOUVy V V AC DC 850V mV Hz Q c 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 DMMS800 Series Specifications Table 3 Measurement Characteristics Characteristic Description DC voltage V ranges 4 V 40 V 400 V 1000 V mV ra
123. Meter Auto Ranging Scope SELECT V PRESS SELECT 1 300 Mm r1 MAX ON OFF mmm 6 C3 ELO Bvac TR L AUTORANGE ON OFF A PUSH BOTH vec EQ gt mw Tektronix POSITION CURSORS WAVEFORM RUN 4 scoPE Ay SCALE TRIGGER ON OFF _ HOLD aooaa ge Figure 1 THM500 Series Instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 THM500 Series Product Description THM500 series instruments will also store waveforms settings and displays With these features you can do the following m Recall settings W Automate test procedures m Save waveforms and screens in the field for later analysis m Transfer waveforms and screens to a personal computer requires optional communications adapter 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates within the environmental conditions specified in Table 4 on page 8 unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least 5 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user The specifications listed for the THM565 also apply to the THM57x series except as noted in Table 1 Table 1 How THM565 and THM57x Series Products Differ 57x 565 Modes L
124. OLD RECALL RESET A store serue Bar 6 COM Vac o 9 Q FUSED oov E ka TRUE RMS Tektronix Figure 1 DMM870 Digital Multimeter Table 1 DMM800 Series Digital Multimeter Features Feature DMM830 DMM870 40 000 display count e e Bargraph e e Centering and zooming e True RMS or average AC measurements e ELS Autorange e IN A e Measurements a DC AC voltage e oe e AC DC voltage e oe e DC AC current e EM e Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DMM800 Series Digital Multimeters Table 1 DMM800 Series Digital Multimeter Features Cont Feature DMM830 DMM870 Resistance e oe e Frequency e EN e Diodes and capacitors e EN e Continuity e EINEN e Duty factor ra 7 e Temperature EE e Decibel e AC volts and amps with Hz display e Measurement hold 9 e Peak hold e Minimum maximum and average values e e M M A time stamp e Delta mode e e HI LO limits e Memory store and recall e e Backlight e Automatic fuse verification e EN e Improper input connection warning e META e 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS800 Series Specifications Specifications Table 2 General Specifications Characteristic LCD display digits Bargraph segments Display count Numeric update rate Bargraph Polarity display Overrange display Low voltage indicator Automatic power off time Power source
125. OR ON OFF off VERTICAL CH 1 CH 2 POSITION Midrange MODE CH1 CH2 CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 GND In HORIZONTAL POSITION Midrange X10 MAG Out X Y Out SWP UNCAL Out TRIGGER LEVEL Midrange MODE AUTO COUPLING AC SOURCE CH 1 CH 2 SLOPE Rising push switch out Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 25 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Power Supply Adjustments 26 To locate the adjustments and test points for the following procedures refer to Figure 7 The Power and High Voltage board occupies the bottom left side of the instrument below the CRT NOTE The power supply section affects all other sections of the instrument If you make repairs or adjustments that change the absolute value of any power supply voltage you must complete the entire adjustment procedure voltages present can cause a fatal injury WARNING Use extreme caution when adjusting the power supply The high Test points Figure 7 Power and High Voltage Board Viewed from the Instrument Bottom 12 V Supply Use the following procedure to adjust the 12 V power supply 1 O Instrument front On the Power and High Voltage board connect the voltmeter common lead to the oscilloscope chassis ground and the measurement lead to the 12 V test point See Figure 7 for the test point location Verify that the voltmeter reads between 11 95
126. Preparation for Adjustment 2 0 0 0 cece ccc ee 11 DTM900 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 c eee eect tenes 13 DTM920 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 c eee cece eens 15 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PA Sa E DTM900 and DTM920 Digital Thermometers The Tektronix DTM900 and DTM920 are hand held digital thermometers that can measure temperature using a variety of thermocouple probes A K type surface measurement bead probe comes standard with both instruments The DTM900 thermometer uses a single K type probe the DTM920 uses K or J type probes The DTM920 thermometer has inputs for two probes and can perform differential measurements In addition the thermometers include the following features Temperature display in C or F A hold feature to freeze the display MIN and MAX readouts DTM900 thermometer includes MAX only A stopwatch DTM920 only Figure 1 DTM900 amp DTM920 Digital Thermometers Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DTM900 and DTM920 Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment unless otherwi
127. S 310 Oscilloscope 070 8570 05 TDS 320 TDS 350 TDS 340 Oscilloscope 070 9435 02 TDS 340A TDS 360 TDS 380 THS 710 Oscilloscope 070 9246 03 THS 720 THS 730 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service fcc if General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to the products in this manual or any products connected to them To avoid potential hazards use these products only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using these products you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for the product you are using Use Proper Voltage Setting Before applying power ensure that the line selector is in the proper position for the power source being used Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product Some of these products are grounded through the grounding conductor or the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product you are using ensure that the pr
128. T gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 2 974 and 3 026 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT Y to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 3 000 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 2 974 and 3 026 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM from the power supply output terminals Overvoltage Complete the following procedures to verify OVP overvoltage protection Protection Accuracy accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 2 Press OVP SET set the OVP to 38 6 V Verify that the power supply readouts display the error message Err 065 3 Press OVP SET again set the OVP to 38 5 V Verify that the power supply readouts display no error message 4 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 34 5 V CURRENT SET LA OVP SET 36V 5 Press
129. THM500 series instrument WAVEFORM ON OFF button to turn the CH 1 waveform display off Press the THM500 series instrument SELECT button to select CH 2 Press the WAVEFORM ON OFF button to turn on channel 2 Press the POSI TION SCALE button to show SCALE then use the A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to 50 mV div Verify that the peak to peak signal displayed on the THM500 series instrument channel 2 is less than 0 5 divisions 25 mVp p Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification DC Offset The following check assesses the DC offset 1 Use the THM500 series instrument menus to select RESET ALL This sets the vertical position to zero 2 Return the THM500 series instrument to SCOPE mode 3 Use the THM500 series instrument UTILITY menu to select CH 1 OFFSET This automatically adjusts the channel offset 4 Use a patch cord to short the THM500 series instrument COM and CH 1 inputs as shown in Figure 11 Patch cord CH1 Figure 11 DC Offset Test Setup 5 Press the THM500 series instrument POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows SCALE in the lower right corner then use the A and Y buttons to set the CH 1 vertical scale to 5 mV div 6 Verify that the offset is less than four pixels from the center graticule line 7 Usethe A and v buttons to set the vertical scale to the next range 8 Repeat steps 6 through 7 above until you have
130. TM 920 J type probe 200 to 100 C 0 19 C 0 3 4 1 1 C 328 to 148 F 0 22 F 0 3 2 2 F 99 9 to 760 C 0 19 C 0 1 0 8 C 02 F 0 1 1 6 F 1000 to 1400 F 2 F 0 3 2 F Table 2 General Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature Range ATPO1 bead probe 40 to 204 C Probe Tolerance ATPO1 bead probe 2 2 C Measurement Rate Readings second DTM900 2 5 DTM920 T2 or T1 1 DTM920 T1 T2 0 5 Input Protection 24 V maximum Class Ill as defined in IEC 1010 Safety Requirements for Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Class Ill equipment is equipment for connection to SELV or SELV E circuits only Electrical Isolation T1 to T2 20 kO minimum Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 DTM900 and DTM920 Specifications Table 3 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature coefficient 18 C or 228 C DTM900 0 15 x specified accuracy per C DTM920 0 1 x specified accuracy per C Operating temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F at 0 to 75 RH Storage temperature 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F at 0 to 80 RH Power requirements Single standard 9 V battery NEDA 1604 JIS 006P IEC 6F22 size Battery life Alkaline DTM900 250 hours DTM920 90 hours 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Performance Verification Performance Verification Test Equipment Thi
131. Technical Reference Tektronix Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 061 4108 00 Warning The servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries prior to performing service Copyright O Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc NEED i Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Service Reference Service information not provided in this manual may be available under separate cover See Table i for a complete list of Handheld and Benchtop Instruments service documentation Table i Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Service Manuals Product Tektronix Part Number 212 Oscilloscope 070 5053 00 214 Oscilloscope 070 5055 00 214 Storage Oscilloscope 070 1483 00 221 Oscilloscope 070 1573 01 222 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 7459 00 222A DSO 8010100 thru B039999 070 8330 00 B040000 and above 070 8330 02 222PS Power Scout 070 8098 02 224 Digital Storage Oscilloscope 070 8405 02 305 DMM Oscilloscope 070 2423 01
132. Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Press OVP SET set the OVP to 7 1 V Verify that the power supply readouts display the error message Err 065 Press OVP SET again set the OVP to 7 V Verify that power supply readouts display no error message Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 4V CURRENT SET LA OVP SET 5V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 02 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 41 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 42 Constant Voltage Load Accuracy 10 11 Press VOLTS ZA to increase the power supply output voltage until the error message Err 013 appears on the readouts Verify that this event occurs between 4 3 and 5 7 V Press SHIFT gt OVP RESET Reset the output voltage to 4 V Repeat steps 6 through 9 above as necessary to determine the exact voltage Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage load accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load
133. V CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH2 INVERT Out CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC Connect a 10 mVp p 50 kHz square wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust VR102 VR202 to obtain a waveform five divisions in amplitude See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations Set the VERTICAL MODE to CH2 and repeat steps 2 and 3 for CH 2 Use the following procedure to adjust the high frequency compensation Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 AC DC AC HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 0 2 us Connect a 20 MHz sine wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform four divisions in amplitude on the display Adjust VC105 and VC106 VC205 VC206 for maximum waveform amplitude See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations Adjust VR103 VR203 to obtain a maximum waveform amplitude See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations Connect a 1 MHz square wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform six divisions in amplitude on the display Adjust VR302 and VC301 to optimize the waveform flatness See Figure 9 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures VC301 3RD COMP E VR302 Instrument front U Figure 9 Power and High Voltage Board Viewed from the Instrument Bottom 7 Adjust VR107 VR207 to optimize the waveform flatness See
134. V divto 2 mV div 5 Variable Gain Typical To 1 2 5 or less of the readout indicated value Common Mode Rejection Ratio Typical 50 kHz gt 50 1 10 MHz gt 10 1 Input Impedance Typical 1 MQ 30 pF Vertical Linearity Typical DC Balance Shift Typical 0 1 division or less of amplitude change when a waveform of two divisions at graticule center is moved vertically 5 mV div to 5 V div 1 mV div to 2 mV div 0 5 divisions 2 0 divisions Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Specifications Table 1 Vertical Deflection Characteristics Cont Characteristic TAS 220 Description TAS 250 Description Chopping Repetition Frequency Typical 250 kHz Maximum Input Voltage 400 V DC peak AC Channel Isolation Typical 50kHz 1000 1 10 MHz 100 1 CH 1 Signal Output Typical 100 mV div open circuit 50 mV div into 50 Q CH 2 INV Balance Typical lt 1 division balanced point variation Table 2 Horizontal Characteristics TAS 200 Series Characteristic Description Standard Sweep Time Accuracy 15 to 35 C 3 0 to 15 C and 35 to 40 C 4 Magnified Sweep Time Accuracy 1 us div to 0 5 sec div 5 0 1 to 0 5 us div 8 Sweep Linearity Standard 3 X10 MAG 5 X10 MAG 0 1 to 0 5 us div 8 Table 3 Readout Characteristics TAS 200 Series Characteristic Description Readout Resolution 1 25 div Readout Accuracy 3 41 25 div Readout Modes
135. VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 1 55A OVP SET 38 5 V 6 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 7 Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 1 500 A 8 Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 V over the adjustment range 9 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off then disable the electronic load 10 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 23 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 24 11 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 12 Repeat steps 5 through 9 above Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 3 Repeat steps 5 thr
136. VR106 VR206 for a minimal trace shift while rotating the front panel CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE control between the fully clockwise and the fully counterclockwise positions See Figure 8 for the adjustment locations Set the VERTICAL MODE to CH2 and repeat step 2 for CH 2 Use the following procedure to adjust the channel 2 inverted balance and position center 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CH2 CH2 GND In Position the trace on the center horizontal graticule line using the CH 2 VERTICAL POSITION control Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 3 Setthe CH 2 VERTICAL INVERT push switch to the in position and note the new trace location 4 Onthe Main board adjust VR213 to position the trace half way back to the center horizontal graticule line See Figure 8 for the adjustment location 5 Setthe channel 2 VERTICAL INVERT push switch to the out position 6 Ifthe trace shifts adjust VR303 to return the trace to the center horizontal graticule line 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to obtain a minimal trace shift lt 1 division when you toggle the CH 2 VERTICAL INVERT push switch in and out ADD Mode Balance Use the following procedure to adjust the ADD mode balance 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE BOTH CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 GND In 2 Position both traces on the center horizontal gratic
137. Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed in Table 8 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 8 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product Universal Calibration Resolution accuracy 4 times Wavetek 9100 with 9105 lead System greater than the multimeter set display reading AC and DC volts measurement AC and DC current measurement Resistance measurement Capacitance measurement Sinewave generation Squarewave generation Thermocouple adapter K Type Tektronix ATK01 Capacitance Standard Optional 1 Choose 4 wire measurement setup if available Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 DMM91X Series Performance Verification Set Up 10 To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following steps 1 Allow the multimeter to stabilize at the ambient temperature for one hour before testing 2 Turn the multimeter on by rotating the function switch to any positi
138. able 5 to return DTM510 and DTM520 thermom eters to factory calibration Table 5 DTM510 and DTM520 Adjustments DTM510 Adjustment Procedure DTM520 Adjustment Procedure 2000 mV Calibration Gain Calibration 0 C Calibration To ensure accurate adjustments use the following or equivalent test equipment If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the adjustment procedures Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures NOTE Before making any adjustment warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 6 Adjustment Test Equipment Description Minimum requirements Thermocouple Simulator 200 to1370 C 0 01 328 to 2498 F 0 01 DC Voltage Source DTM520 10 mV to 2 V 0 0196 accuracy Thermocouple Extension K type thermocouple wire with Cable SMP male end connectors Transition Adapter DTM520 SMP female to male banana Omega TAS U 5 Examples Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibration System or Fluke 5500A Calibrator Omega TECK 10 10 Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DTM510 and DTM520 adjustments W Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative hu
139. adout indicates between 35 950 and 36 050 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 13 14 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Repeat steps 2 through 12 above to measure the OUTPUT 2 voltage setting and readout accuracy Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 9 10 11 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V OVP SET 7N Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 VDC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 5 972 and 6 028 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS V to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 6 00 VDC Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 5 950 and 6 050 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across
140. ailures M Automatic screen save on failures m Time and date stamp on failure Motor Test Will stabilize trigger on pulse width modulated signals generated by variable speed AC motor drives Vertical Channels Each channelis identical 2 Probe Interface Shrouded banana jack Accepts 4 mm caged spring safety style banana plug Use probes incorporating 9 leaf spring contacts only Votson Range mito so vita rzs Teee m Homar Te ele TU Pc AC com comme e e puted boues aos i fe Analog Bandwidth 5 mV div DC to 1 MHz e 10 mV divto 2 V div DC to 5 MHz 5 to 500 V div DC to 1 MHz Maximum Input Voltage 600 Va us ejo o DC Accuracy AV 3 5 2 pixels 19 to 27 C derate by 0 25 per C outside the range e jo o Derate additional 0 5 at5 mV div Linear range is 8 divisions from COM common Crosstalk Between Channels 2100 1 at5 MHz with other channel connected to COM common ojo Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 THM500 Series Specifications Table 3 Scope Specifications Cont 550 560 565 Vertical Mathematics Subtract CH 1 CH 2 e Add CH 1 4 CH 2 Acquisition Modes e Acquisition R ate All modes except Dynamic DSP Up to five waveforms per second Dynamic DSP Mode Up to 750 waveforms per second redisplayed at a slower rate Horizontal Time Division Range 60 s div to 200 ns div in a 1 2 5 sequence e Time Base Accuracy 0 1 1 pixel
141. akHold points shorted 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DMMS800 Series Digital Multimeters 070 9850 00 AA ni Table of Contents DMMS00 Series Digital Multimeters ooooooooooo oo 1 Specifications ecs ee uer nh er yt tee Sin BG Reo nih er e 3 Performance Verification eee 8 Test Equipment Li ces Dc og S Aon as SUCUS eat Soc aO 9 Set Ups coo esae eno wp t CP A BO due hid NEP de rRNA 10 Verification Procedure ose enren a n 11 DMMS30 Test Records meriissrain ts A A 18 DMMSS0 TestRECOTOS siii AE a 22 DMMS70 Test Records 0 eee eee eee ee 27 Adjustment Procedures oooooooooooooocoocsoroscososso 32 List of Adjustments onenean 0 00 ccc cece n 32 Test Equipment ee crre cae chee eh er e e EE dc e eds 33 Preparation for Adjustment o oooooooocooorr eh 33 Adjustments Part 1 sire ete eee e RR REESE re eds 35 Adjustments Part 2 llis n 38 Reassembling the Multimeter ooooooooocorrorrrr eee 39 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service E ee DMM800 Series Digital Multimeters The Tektronix DMM800 Series digital multimeters provide many features Table 1 lists the features of each meter for easy comparison TEHKDMM870 LIGHT PEAKH DIGITS AUTOH lt wma Rance H
142. alibration is complete Output 2 Use the following steps to calibrate OUTPUT 2 1 2 3 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Perform steps 2 through 5 of the Output 1 procedure above Connect the DMM positive and negative leads to the corresponding front panel OUTPUT 2 and terminals Perform steps 7 through 18 of the Output 1 procedure above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures Parallel Output Current Offset Use the following steps to calibrate the parallel output offset current 1 2 3 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Press SHIFT CURRENT Y Enter the calibration password on the keypad PS2520 amp PS2520G enter 2520 lt gt PS2521 amp PS2521G enter 2521 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL00 indicating calibration mode Configure the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC Enter 4 on the power supply keypad and press Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display and the readout displays cL40 indicating parallel output current offset calibration Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press The power supply readout will return to normal in approximately 10 seconds The calibration is complete Parallel Output Current Full Scale Use the following steps to calibrate the parallel output full scale cu
143. ams CAT II Resolution 400 A Range 0 1A 1000 A Range 1A Accuracy 40 Hz to 400 Hz 0A to 400A 1 9 of reading 8 counts 401 A to 1000 A 2 9 of reading 5 counts Crest Factor 1 4 to 2 0 add 1 0 to accuracy 2 0 to 2 5 add 2 5 to accuracy DC Current Auto Ranging Ranges 400A and 1000A Resolution 400 A Range 0 1A 1000 A Range 1A 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Specifications Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Accuracy OA to 20A 1 9 of reading 10 counts 20 1 A to 400A 1 9 of reading 40 counts 401 A to 1000 A 2 9 of reading 5 counts Frequency Auto Ranging Ranges 4 kHz and 10 kHz Sensitivity 6 Anus 10 Arms 1kHz to 10 kHz Resolution 4 kHz Range 1 Hz 10 kHz Range 10 Hz Accuracy 0 5 of reading 3 counts Peak Hold Range Low High Resolution Low 0 1A High 1 0A Accuracy 3 of reading 10 counts Table 2 General Specifications Characteristic Description Auto Power Off Approximately 30 minutes Battery 9 V NEDA1604 IECGF 22 JIS 006P Battery Life 40 hours alkaline Maximum Conductor Size 51 mm 2 inch diameter or 24 x 60 mm 95 x 2 36 inch bus bar Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 DCM330 Specifications Table 3 Certifications and Compliances Canadian Standards Association certified to Standard CSA 1010 1 Standard UL3111 1 for Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Testing E
144. ance Verification 40 Overvoltage Protection Accuracy 10 11 12 13 14 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 4 970 and 5 030 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT Y to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 3 000 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 4 970 and 5 030 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM from the power supply output terminals Complete the following procedures to verify OVP overvoltage protection accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 2 Press OVP SET and set the OVP to 22 6 V Verify that the power supply readouts display the error messag
145. and 12 05 V If the reading ASTIG FREQ ADJ VR604 VR701 SUB INTENSITY VR603 SUB FOCUS 12V ADJ VR602 VR601 000000 00000 is within these limits go to step 4 Adjust VR601 for a voltmeter reading of 12 V See Figure 7 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 4 Verify that the voltage levels in Table 21 are within the specified limits See Figure 7 for the test point locations Table 21 Power Supply Limits Power Supply Test Point Limits Volts 12 12 11 95 to 12 05 12 12 11 80 to 12 20 5 5 4 75 to 45 25 185 TAS 220 185 180 to 190 145 TAS 250 145 140 to 150 NOTE If a power supply measurement exceeds the limits specified in Table 21 discontinue the adjustment procedures Contact a Tektronix service center for instrument repair 5 Disconnect the voltmeter from the instrument Intensity Use the following procedure to adjust the display intensity 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms TRIGGER HOLDOFF NORM 2 Rotate the front panel INTENSITY control to the fully counterclockwise position then rotate the control clockwise to the 90 nine o clock position 3 Locate VR603 on the Power and High Voltage board see Figure 7 for the adjustment location Adjust VR603 until the trace is barely visible 4 Rotate the
146. and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 DMMO091X Series Specifications Table 3 Measurement Characteristics Characteristic Description DC voltage V ranges 4 V 40 V 400 V 1000 V mV range 400 mV Accuracy 96 10 counts DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 0 2 0 1 0 06 AC voltage Ranges 4V 40 V 400 V 750 V Accuracy 40 counts DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 50 to 100 Hz 1 0 0 8 0 7 gt 100 to 1 kHz 2 5 2 0 1 5 gt 1 kHz to 10 kHz 3 596 2 59 gt 10 kHz to 20 kHz 13 59 Bandwidth DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 1 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz Crest factor lt 3 Input impedance AC DC volts dBm dB Current AC and DC ranges DC accuracy 10 counts AC accuracy 80 counts Bandwidth typical Resistance Ranges Q ranges LV ranges Accuracy Q 96 10 counts 10 MO paralleled by 100 pF Same as AC RMS 4 1 296 10 counts dBm reference 2 1 mV into 600 Q dB reference 21 V 4 000 pA 400 mA 10 A 20A maximum for 30 seconds DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 1 kHz 400 Q 4 KQ 40 KQ 400 KO 4 MO 40 MO 4kQ 40 KQO 400kO 4MQ 40 MQ DMM912 DMM914 DMM916 10 596 10 496 10 396 LV 96 1 count 23 1 0 8 30 696 4MQ 400 Q range 1 0 8 0 6 40 MQ range 5 5 5 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMO091X Series Specifications Table 3 Measurement Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Compl
147. asic Service THM420 Performance Verification Table 9 DC Voltage Accuracy Readout Limits THM420 Range DC Voltage Source Minimum Maximum 400m V 300 0 mV 298 9 mV 301 1 mV 4V 3 000 V 2 989 V 3 011 V 40V 30 00 V 29 89 V 30 11 V 400 V 300 0 V 298 9 V 301 1V 850 V 450 V 441 V 453V 6 Disable the voltage source output 7 Do not disconnect the test setup AC Voltage The following check verifies AC voltage measurement accuracy 1 Setthe THM420 DC AC button to ACV 2 Configure the voltage source to output AC 3 Set the controls of the THM420 and the voltage source to each of the values listed in Table 10 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits Table 10 AC Voltage Accuracy AC Voltage Source Readout Limits THM420 Range Voltage Frequency Minimum Maximum Z 300 0 mV 1 kH 3 000 V 50 Hz 400 mV 295 0 mV 305 0 mV 4V 2 965 V 3 035 V 40V 30 00 V 1kHz 29 50 V 30 50 V 400 V 300 0 V 1 kHz 295 0 V 305 0 V 1 kHz 438 V 462 V 600 V 450 V 4 Disable the voltage source output 5 Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 THM420 Performance Verification Resistance The following check verifies resistance measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to 2 2 Connect the resistance source output to the THM420 COM and the V Q Hz gt input connectors 3 Set the controls of the THM420 and the resistance so
148. asic Service 97 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedure 58 Full Calibration To calibrate PS2520 series power supplies you must create voltage and current constants and store them in nonvolatile RAM Each set of constants consist of an offset and full scale value You can perform either partial or full calibrations To perform a full calibration the power supply follows a preset procedure that allows you to set the voltage current and overvoltage protection values You can also make individual calibrations as identified in Table 10 Each calibration procedure is identified by a display code Table 10 Calibration Display Codes Display Code Calibration Description cL00 Password accepted initiate calibration cL10 Voltage offset cL11 Voltage full scale cL20 Current offset cL21 Current full scale cL2F Current offset or current full scale calibration complete cL30 Overvoltage protection offset cL31 Overvoltage protection full scale cL40 Parallel output current offset cL41 Parallel output current full scale NOTE If the calibration procedure detects an error the readout will display an error code See your User manual for a list of error code descriptions To perform a full calibration perform the following procedures in sequential order Output 1 Use the following steps to calibrate OUTPUT 1 1 Press SHIFT OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on th
149. ata eddie IR ita 8 Verification Procedure gosein e ia a n 8 Adjustment Procedures sesssesssesesesesesseseseseseoe 14 Preparation for Adjustment o ooooooocooor eh 14 Adjustment Procedure ooooooooocorr n 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service A A THM420 Digital Multimeter The Tektronix THM420 multipurpose instrument combines the functions of a digital multimeter with the ability to display waveforms The THM420 includes the following features 3 digits 4000 count LCD display with bargraph Waveform display with the press of a button A variety of measurement functions DC AC voltage DC AC current resistance frequency diode testing continuity checking True RMS measurements Autoranging for DMM and waveform display Measurement hold Input overvoltage and overcurrent warning beeper TEKWAVEMETER TRUE RMS AUTO POWER OFF METER AUTO DC AC SCOPE SELECT C J RUN HOLD PRINT LIGHT Tektronix COM V Q in A mA NON wax 2O FUSED 350V ruseo oon 10 for 2 min Figure 1 THM420 Instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 THM420 Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environmen
150. ator gt 0 2 accuracy X50 Current multiplier Coils Resistance Calibrator gt 0 3 accuracy Set Up To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following 1 Turn the DCM300 DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeter on by sliding the function switch to any position other than OFF 2 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 3 Photocopy the Test Records on pages 8 and 9 Use them to record your test results Verification Procedure The following checks verify the performance of your DCM300 or DCM320 multimeter malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment WARNING The following procedures produce magnetic fields that may cause a AC Current Check To check the AC current accuracy perform the following steps 1 Setthe multimeter function switch to the A position 2 Set up the AC Current calibrator to output the values specified in Table 7 on page 8 3 Select the appropriate coils to multiply the AC Current calibrator output for each of the values listed in Table 7 4 For each of the conditions listed in Table 7 position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Performance Verification 5 6 Verify that the multimeter display reads within the specified Low and High Limits for each of the specified conditions
151. ble the thermometer following the adjustments perform steps 3 through 7 above in reverse order Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures DTM510 Adjustment Procedure This section describes how to adjust the DTM510 thermometer To properly adjust the thermometer perform the following steps in sequential order 1 Open the thermometer as described in the previous section Turn on the thermometer and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes Connect the thermocouple simulator to the probe connector Set the simulator probe type to K E T3 For each row in Table 7 set the thermometer and simulator as shown then adjust the specified test point until the displayed temperature is within the proper limits Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment points Table 7 DTM510 Adjustment Procedures Thermometer Setting Simulator Setting C F Temperature Test Point Temperature Limits C 0 1 0 C VR1 00 1 and 00 1 F 1 1000 C VR3 1831 and 1833 C 1 1000 C VR5 999 and 1001 C 0 1 190 C VR2 189 9 and 190 1 F 0 1 0 C VR4 31 9 and 32 1 C 1 1000 C VR3 999 and 1001 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures Figure 2 DTM510 Thermometer Disassembly and Adjustment Locations 14 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures DTM520 Adjust
152. button when turning the dial from the OFF position 3 Warm up the multimeter for five minutes 4 Setthe Digits to the 40 000 counts display 5 Pages 18 through 31 contain Test Records for the DMMS00 series multime ters Each model has its own test record Photocopy the Test Records pages for your model and use them to record your test results NOTE If stability of the display reading causes questionable accuracy of a test set the multimeter to Average mode Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification Verification Procedure Implement the following checks to verify the performance of your DMM800 Series multimeter N WARNING To avoid electric shock avoid touching exposed connections AC Volts Check Perform the following steps to verify the AC voltage measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the AC Volts Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter DC Volts Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC volts measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set
153. chtop or portable instruments All PS2320 series power supplies include the following standard features Three high stability low drift outputs outputs may be configured for independent series or parallel operation Automatic series or parallel tracking Push button controls Keypad and up down key data entry Four digit display of voltage and current High resolution digital to analog converter Memory storage and recall Display readout of output memory and error codes Automatic sequencing with timer Self test diagnostic at power up Overvoltage protection OVP and overcurrent protection OCP Tektronix PS2521G Programmable Power Supply INTERFACE MEMORY CURRENT A OUTPUT OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION OVE RESET LJ C OVERCURRENT NER a 4 O Ei BN m ES SET E SEQ CURRENT euet xm OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 qo 6 0 20V 0 6V e EN 2 5A 5A Q OO O O4 G 0 SLAVE MASTER Figure 1 PS2520 and PS2521G Power Supply Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 PS2520 Series Product Description The descriptions and procedures in the following sections apply to all PS2520 series power supplies unless specifically noted with the following exceptions m The PS2520 and PS2520G power supplies have two variable outputs providing 0 to 36 V at 0 to 1 5 A and one variable output providing 0 to 6 V at 0 to 3A W The PS2521 and PS2521G power supplies have two var
154. circuitry that permits the display of TV signals You can automatically select vertical and horizontal signals with the SEC DIV control Automatic focus following an initial intensity adjustment Tektronix TAS 220 7 Figure 1 TAS 220 Oscilloscope Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 TAS 200 Series Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions The instrument operates in a 0 to 40 C ambient environment unless otherwise noted The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes The instrument is adjusted at an ambient temperature between 20 and 30 C NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user NOTE Input limits apply to signals with frequencies less than 1 kHz Table 1 Vertical Deflection Characteristics Characteristic Frequency Bandwidth 3 dB TAS 220 Description DC to 20 MHz 5 mV div to 5 V div at5 to 35 C DC to 15 MHz DC to 10 MHz 1mV div to 2 mV div TAS 250 Description DC to 50 MHz at 0 to 10 C and 35 to 40 C DC to 40 MHz at 0 to 5 C and 35 to 40 C DC to 15 MHz Vertical Gain 15 to 35 C 5 mV div to 5 V div 3 1 m
155. ck light operates properly 1 Press the THM420 LIGHT button and verify that the back light is on Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 THM420 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures This section contains procedures to adjust the THM420 If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifica tions In this section you will find the following information m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your instrument meets factory specifications perform the procedures in the Perfor mance Verification section Preparation for Adjustment Remove the Bottom Cover 14 The following guidelines apply to all instrument adjustments W Perform all adjustments in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 86 F ambient environ ment m Before making any adjustment warm up the instrument for at least 20 minutes m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first m Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must remove the bottom cover to gain access to the internal adjustments To remove the cover refer to Figure 2 while performing the following steps 1 Remove the battery pack Lay the instrument
156. completed press EXIT SETUP blue button Turn the calibrator output off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 37 DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures DC Amperes Adjustments Part 2 38 AC Response 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to adjust the DC amperes calibration 1 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM inputs Set calibrator to output 10 00 A O Press and hold the gold button for five seconds The multimeter beeps twice when the gold button is first pressed and then two more beeps follow after five seconds 5 Press the SETUP button and wait for the calibration to finish CAL is displayed during the calibration After the calibration is completed press EXIT SETUP blue button 6 Turn the calibrator output off 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter To perform the following procedure you must lift out the entire circuit board assembly from the top case half to access the adjustments Perform this proce dure only if the Performance Verification procedure indicates that the AC voltage accuracy checks above 60 Hz is out of specification Figure 4 Adjustment locations 2 M2 Perform the following steps to adjust the AC voltage calibration above 60 Hz 1 Set the multimeter dial to V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS800 Series Adjustment Procedures
157. cope as follows VERTICAL MODE X Y CH 1 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 VARIABLE CAL HORIZONTAL X Y In Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 37 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 38 X Axis Offset TRIGGER COUPLING AC TRIGGER SOURCE X Y 2 Use a 50 Q coaxial cable to connect the square wave generator to the CH 1 input Set up the generator for a 1 KHz 50 mV output 3 Adjust VR109 for exactly five divisions of horizontal deflection on the display See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Use the following procedure to adjust the X axis DC offset 1 Setup the oscilloscope as follows CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VOLTS DIV 50 mV CH 1 GND In HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms HORIZONTAL X Y Out TRIGGER MODE AUTO 2 Position the trace vertically to the horizontal center graticule line 3 Position the left edge of the trace horizontally to the first vertical graticule line extreme left 4 Setthe HORIZONTAL X Y push switch to the in position 5 Adjust VR401 to position the spot to the center vertical graticule line See Figure 10 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Trigger Adjustments Trigger DC Offset Trigger Slope Balance To locate the adjustments for the following procedures refer to Figures 8 and 10 The Main board occupies the bottom right side of the instrument Use the following procedure t
158. copy the test records on pages 7 through 9 Use them to record your test results Verification Procedure Implement the following tests to verify the temperature measurement accuracy of your DTM510 or DTM520 thermometer 1 Connect the thermocouple simulator output to the temperature probe input For the DTM520 connect the simulator to the T1 input connector then repeat the test using the T2 input connector NOTE Thermocouple connectors are temperature sensitive For best measure ment accuracy do not touch the connector contacts and minimize handling of the connector housings 2 Setthe simulator to the correct probe type The DTM510 thermometer uses a K type probe The DTM520 thermometer can use either a K or J type probe 3 Foreach of the conditions specified in the test records do the following a Set the thermometer Resolution to 0 1 or 1 DTM510 only b Set the thermometer to measure C or F c Set the calibrator to each of the temperature values shown in the test records then verify that the thermometer display reads within the specified Low and High limits 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTMS00 Series Performance Verification DTM510 Test Record Procedure Performed By Date Serial Number 28 9 01 0 31 1 51 12 101 2 47 9 20 0 02 0 192 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Performance Verification
159. counts 350 60 V 369 40 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 0 7 40 counts 740 7 V 759 3V 1 Verify the proper DMM range 5 display digits use the manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits 2 Theupper display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 06 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 06 10 counts 3 5969 V 3 6031 V 3 6000 V 0 06 10 counts 3 6031V 3 5969 V 36 000 V 0 06 10 counts 35 969 V 36 031 V 360 00 V 0 06 10 counts 359 69 V 360 31 V 1000 0 V 0 06 10 counts 998 4 V 1001 6 V 1000 0 V 0 06 10 counts 1001 6V 998 4 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 27 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM670 Test Record Cont Test Input DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 0 10 mV 0 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 39 88 mV 40 12 mV 360 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 359 69 mV 360 31 mV 360 00 mV 0 06 10 counts 360 31 mV 359 69 mV AC DC Volts Test 1 000 V 1 9 14 counts 1 033 V 1 000 V DC 1 9 14 counts 0 967 V 1 033V 1 000 V 60 Hz 1 9 14 counts 0 967 V 1 033V 1 4000 count mode only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 0 01 10 counts 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz 1Vp p 0 01
160. ct SCOPE mode Set the AC DC button to DC 2 3 4 Connect the COM input to the V Q Hz input with a shorting strap 5 Setthe vertical offset POS to 0 mV 6 Setthe vertical SCALE to 200 V 7 Adjust R80 to align the trace to the display center line See Figure 4 for the adjustment location 8 Setthe vertical scale to 20 mV 9 Adjust R84 to align the trace to the display center 10 If necessary repeat steps 5 through 9 above to achieve a fine adjustment 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Adjustment Procedures 11 12 13 14 15 16 Turn the rotary switch to mA Press the METER SCOPE button to select SCOPE mode Set the AC DC button to DC Set the vertical offset POS to 0 mA Set the vertical SCALE to 2 mA Adjust R86 to align the trace to the display center Figure 4 Adjustment Locations Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 THM420 Adjustment Procedures 18 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix THMS500 Series Instruments 070 9857 00 AA ni Table of Contents THM500 Series Instruments eee 1 Sp cifications 1 5 4 9 e Sn Seo ble aw er CE 3 Performance Verification ooooooooooooooooooooooo 9 Test Equipment ii cen e Miata acta SAU Ras CUSCO aot Soc api n 10 Functional Test ni OE E UU Rid gw RR e CB Oe ENS 11 DMM Verification x 2d e hr
161. d Procedure Performed By Date Serial Number 28 9 01 0 31 1 51 12 101 2 47 9 20 0 02 0 192 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Performance Verification DTM920 Test Record Serial Number Procedure Performed By Date Probe Type Low Limit Test Result High Limit Emaec me A 99 0 C 08 2 0 09 C 0 7 50 0 C 50 8 500 0 C 501 2 998 0 C 999 7 1360 C 1365 317 144 5 14 101 5 500 F 501 9 990 F 992 4 1980 F 1988 2480 F 2471 2489 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Performance Verification DTM920 Test Record Cont Probe type Low limit Test result High limit J 198 0 C 199 7 196 3 0 09 F 1 6 1 6 100 0 F 98 3 101 7 500 0 F 497 9 502 1 990 0 F 987 4 992 6 1390 F 1384 1396 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments Test Equipment 10 This section contains procedures to adjust DTM900 and DTM920 thermometers If your thermometer fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare t
162. d 1001 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures Figure 2 DTM900 Thermometer Disassembly and Adjustment Locations 14 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures DTM920 Adjustment Procedure This section describes how to adjust the DTM920 thermometer To properly adjust the thermometer perform the following steps in sequential order Figure 3 shows the location of the test and adjustment points 1 2 3 Open the thermometer See page 12 for instructions Solder a jumper across R25 Turn on the thermometer and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes 2000 mV Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a 2000 mV calibration 1 2 3 Press T2 once to access the T2 mode Install a jumper across the test points marked JP1 Connect the DC voltage source to the T1 probe connector The composition of both lead wires should be identical Set the DC voltage source output to 2000 0 mV 30 0146 Adjust VR2 until the display shows 2000 0 The first digit of the temperature appears at the upper right hand corner of the display Disconnect the DC voltage source Remove the R25 jumper Do not remove the JP1 jumper Gain Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a gain calibration 1 2 3 Press C F until 1L appears in the upper left hand corner of the dis
163. d in this procedure To adjust the 5 V fixed output perform the following steps 1 Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 5 25 V 2 Connect the digital multimeter to the terminals of the 5 V FIXED 3A output 3 Adjust VR401 5 V circuit board until the multimeter displays 5 00 V 0 25 V 4 Disconnect the multimeter from the power supply O VR401 VR403 VR402 Q Figure 10 5 V Circuit Board Adjustments Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Current Limit To adjust the current limit perform the following steps 1 2 Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of 3 25 A Adjust VR403 5 V circuit board fully counterclockwise Connect a variable load and the multimeter in series to the terminals of the 5 V FIXED 3A output Adjust the variable load until the multimeter displays 3 25 A Disconnect the multimeter from the power supply and reconnect the variable load without changing the setting to the terminals of the 5 V FIXED 3A output Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 5 25 V Connect the digital multimeter to the terminals of the 5 V FIXED 3A output Slowly adjust VR403 5 V circuit board clockwise until the multimeter display shows a voltage drop of 5 to 6 mV Disconnect the test setup Overload Indicator To adjust the current limit overload indicator perform the following steps 1 2 22
164. dures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DCM910 Performance Verification Table 6 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product AC DC Current Calibrator gt 0 5 accuracy 0 to 400 A Wavetek 9100 with Option 50 7 accuracy 400 to 1000 A 200 current multiplier coils Set Up To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following 1 Turn the DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter on 2 Warm up the meter for 20 minutes 3 Photocopy the Test Records on pages 9 and 10 Use them to record your test results Verification Procedure The following checks verify the performance of your DCM910 meter i WARNING The following procedures produce magnetic fields that may cause a malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment AC Current Check To check the AC current accuracy perform the following steps 1 Set the meter function to AC 2 Select the appro
165. e Err 065 3 Press OVP SET again and set the OVP to 22 5 V Verify that the power supply readouts display no error message 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 18V CURRENT SET LA OVP SET 20V 5 Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 02 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Press VOLTS ZA to increase the power supply output voltage until the error message Err 013 appears on the readouts Verify that this event occurs between 19 00 and 21 00 V Press SHIFT gt OVP RESET Reset the output voltage to 18 V Repeat steps 6 through 9 above as necessary to determine the exact voltage Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Repeat steps 2 through 11 above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 With the power supply still set to OUT 2 press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Repeat steps 2 through 11 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3
166. e 20 to 460 C Humidity Operating lt 80 Altitude Operating 2 000 m 6 562 ft Nonoperating 12 300 m 40354 ft Vibration Operating 2 66 gnus 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minutes each Nonoperating 3 48 gnus 5 to 500 Hz 3 axes 10 minutes each Table 6 Certifications and Compliances Characteristic Description Meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 ECC for Product Safety Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official J ournal of the European Communities EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted E missions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 801 3 RF Radiated EN 61010 1 Electrical equipment safety requirements for measurement control and laboratory use Certified UL3111 1 and CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 EC Declaration of Conformity Certifications 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Specifications Table 6 Certifications and Compliances Cont Description CAT III Distribution level mains fixed installation CAT Il Local level mains appliances portable equipment CAT I Signal level special equipment or parts of equipment telecommunication electronics Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be present Characteristic Overvoltage category Pollution Degree 2 Handheld and B
167. e Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 1 V Press VOLTS Y and verify that as you attempt to decrease the voltage below 0 00 V Err 018 appears on the CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts The voltage should decrease in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press VOLTS A and verify that as you attempt to increase the voltage past 6 50 V Err 016 appears on readouts The voltage should increase in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to l A Press CURRENT Y and verify that as you attempt to decrease the current below 0 000 A Err 019 appears on the readouts and the C C indicator lights The current should decrease in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout Press CURRENT ZA and verify that as you attempt to increase the current past 3 100 A Err 017 appears on the readouts The current should increase in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout OCP Series and Parallel Mode Indicators Use the following steps to verify OCP series and parallel output indicator function 1 On the power supply front panel press OCP ON OFF to enable the OCP Verify that the OCP indicator lights up on the display Press OCP ON OFF Verify that the OCP indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure the power supply outputs for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure the power s
168. e multimeter face Remove the three screws from the case bottom using a standard Philips head screwdriver Gently lift the end of the case bottom at the end opposite from the display Then lift the end nearest the display until it unsnaps from the case top See Figure 2 for details To reassemble the multimeter following the adjustments see page 39 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 33 DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures Case bottom Remove screws 3 y A ASA Figure 2 Opening the Meter Case 34 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM800 Series Adjustment Procedures Adjustments Part 1 The procedures within this section use the adjustments accessible with the back case removed from the multimeter VR 4 DMM850 and DMM870 Case top Figure 3 Adjustment locations 1 DC Volts Perform the following steps to adjust the DC voltage calibration 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Set the calibrator to output 3 0000 VDC Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V OQ4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VR5 until the display shows 2 9999 to 3 0001 VDC Turn the calibrator output off Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 35 DMMS800 Series Adjustment Procedures 36 AC Volts Capacitance Perform the following steps to adjust the AC voltage calibration at 60 Hz 1
169. e DMM to measure 5 amperes DC Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 2 55A OVP SET 22 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 2 500 A Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 volts over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF and disable the electronic load 10 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 11 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 12 Repeat steps 5 through 9 above Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminal
170. e display 2 Press SHIFT CURRENT Y Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures 3 Enter the calibration password on the keypad PS2520 amp PS2520G enter 2520 lt gt PS2521 amp PS2521G enter 2521 lt gt 4 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL00 indicating calibration mode 5 Configure the DMM to measure DC volts autorange 6 Connect the DMM positive and negative leads to the corresponding front panel OUTPUT 1 and terminals 7 Press lt on the power supply keypad Verify that the power supply readout displays cL10 indicating voltage offset calibration 8 Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press 9 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL11 indicating voltage full scale calibration 10 Adjust VR501 and VR601 to the settings listed in Table 11 See Figure 13 for the adjustment locations Following the adjustment enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press lt Table 11 Voltage Full scale Adjustment Full Calibration Instrument Model To Cal OUTPUT 1 To Cal OUTPUT 2 P52520 P 2520G Adjust VR601 fora DMM Adjust VR501 fora DMM reading of 37 00 V reading of 37 00 V P52521 P 2521G Adjust VR601 for a DMM Adjust VR601 fora DMM reading of 21 00 V reading of 21 00 V 11 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL20 indicating current offset calibration 12 Configure
171. ed Press the clamp meter DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the display Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR6 until the display reads 400 Remove the clamp meter from the coil To adjust the AC 400 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 390 A at 400 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Adjustment Procedures Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR8 until the display reads 396 0 To keep the meter on the lower range it may be necessary to cycle the calibrator output off and on Remove the clamp meter from the coil AC 1000 A Range To adjust the AC 1000 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of AC current calibrator to 400 A at 400 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR7 until the display reads 400 Remove the clamp meter from the coil Peak Hold To adjust the peak hold calibration perform the following steps 1 E
172. ee Table 7 for the appropriate load resistor values 9 Verify that the power supply output current varies less than 0 2 3 mA while shunting load resistor RL1 with the shorting strap See Figure 2 above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 7 PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification SLAVE Current Regulation INDEP Mode MASTER Current Regulation PARALLEL Mode 8 Table 7 Load Resistor Values for Current Checks 200 30W 20 5W 20 Q 30 W 10 Q 30 W 10 O 30 W INDEP PARALLEL 10 30 W The following check verifies the INDEP mode SLAVE current regulation performance 1 Set the power supply SLAVE AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to AMPS 2 Set up the digital multimeter to measure 25 VDC 3 Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the power supply SLAVE output 4 Adjust the power supply SLAVE VOLTAGE control until the multimeter reads 25 VDC 5 Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply 6 Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of at least 1 A PS280 or 0 5 A PS283 7 Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the and terminals of the power supply SLAVE output as shown in Figure 2 See Table 7 for the appropriate load resistor values 8 Verify that the power supply output current varies less than 0 2 3 mA while shunting load resistor RL1 with the shorting strap See Figure 2 above The following check ve
173. el OUTPUT 3 terminals See Figure 4 for details 3 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3 1A OVP SET 7N 4 Repeat steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above 5 Remove the Variac from the test setup and repower the instrument Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize before the next check Constant Current Load Complete the following procedures to verify constant current load and overcur and Overcurrent rent protection accuracy Protection Accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 5 for details igi i Electronic load Digital multimeter Power supply j Figure 5 Constant Current Load Test Setup 3 Set the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 1 5A OVP SET 38 5 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 27 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the C C indicator lig
174. enchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the DMM912 DMM914 and DMM916 Digital Multimeters perform as warranted If an instrument fails any of these checks it needs adjustment and or repair The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The multimeter operates in an 18 to 28 C 64 to 82 F ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 75 m The multimeter stabilizes in the stated ambient temperature for one hour m The multimeter warms up for five minutes W For AC measurements allow the multimeter to settle to its final value before taking the measurement m The multimeter remains fully assembled and in the holster The DMM91X Series performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 7 Table 7 Performance Verification Checks AC Volts Check DC Volts Check DC Millivolts Check AC DC Volts Check Frequency Check Duty Factor Check DMM914 and DMM916 Q Check Low Voltage O Check Continuity Check Diode Check Capacitance Check Temperature Check DMM 914 and DMM916 Volts Peak Hold Check DMM916 DC Milliampere Check AC Milliampere Check DC Ampere Check AC Ampere Check Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance
175. ended test equipment and initial settings for all verification procedures listed on page 8 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 7 PS2520 Series Performance Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 6 Performance Verification Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product Digital Multimeter DMM 500 V 10 A accuracy within 0 01 Fluke 8505A Oscilloscope 20 MHz 396 vertical deflection accuracy Tektronix TDS 300 Series Electronic Load 40 V 8A CR mode Variac 0 to 250V 2A Resistors 2 2 050 W 27 Q 100 W Set Up Following a 20 minute warm up period preset your power supply to the settings listed in Table 7 Table 7 Power Supply Initial Settings Control Setting SHIFT RECALL Enter 00 on keypad AUTO SEQ OFF SHIFT OUT 1 OCP OFF SHIFT SERIES INDEP INDEP SHIFT PARA INDEP INDEP OUTPUT OFF STEP SET volts 1
176. ents listed in Table 8 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 8 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product Universal Calibration Resolution amp accuracy 4 times Wavetek 9100 with 9105 lead System greater than the multimeter set display reading AC and DC volts measurement AC and DC current measurement Resistance measurement Capacitance measurement Sinewave generation Squarewave generation Thermocouple adapter K Type Tektronix ATK01 Capacitance Standard Optional 1 Choose 4 wire measurement setup if available Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 9 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification Set Up 10 To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following steps 1 Allow the multimeter to stabilize at the ambient temperature for one hour before testing 2 Turn the multimeter on by rotating the function switch to any position other than OFF NOTE You need to keep the multimeter powered on throughout the warm up period and throughout the entire verification procedure Set the auto power off time to a large value or disable the auto power off by pushing the Blue
177. equipment needed for the adjustment procedures These procedures assume that all test equipment is operating within tolerance Detailed operating instructions for test equipment are not given in this procedure If you need operating information refer to the instruction manual of the test equipment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DCM910 Adjustment Procedures Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DCM910 adjustments Adjustment Procedure 12 Open the Meter Case A Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less Before making any adjustment warm up the current meter for at least 30 minutes Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must open the meter case to gain access to the internal adjustments 1 2 Lay the meter face down on a flat work surface Remove the two screws from the case bottom with a Phillips head screwdriver Gently lift the end of the case bottom until it unsnaps from the case top Remove the three screws that secure the circuit board assembly to the case top Do not remove the screws that secure the circuit boards to each other To access the adjustments lift the circuit board assembly far enou
178. er display readout is 2 counts corresponding to the input frequency 3 750V range not specified above 100 Hz DC Volts Test 0 0000 V 0 2 10 counts 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 3 6000 V 0 2 10 counts 3 5918 V 3 6082 V 3 6000 V 0 2 10 counts 3 6082 V 3 5918 V 36 000 V 0 2 10 counts 35 918 V 36 082 V 360 00 V 0 2 10 counts 359 18 V 360 82 V 1000 0 V 0 2 10 counts 997 0 V 1003 0 V 1000 0 V 0 2 10 counts 1003 0 V 997 0 V DC Millivolts Test 0 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 0 10 mV 0 10 mV 40 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 39 82 mV 40 18 mV 360 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 359 18 mV 360 82 mV 360 00 mV 0 2 10 counts 360 82 mV 359 18 mV 18 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM630 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum AC DC Volts Test 1 000 V 2 2 14 counts 0 964 V 1 036 V 1 000 V Bec 2 2 14 counts 0 964 V 1 000 V 60Hz 22 14 counts 0 964 Y 1 4000 count a only Frequency Test 20 00 Hz y 0 01 10 counts 19 90 Hz 20 10 Hz 100 00 Hz 1 Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 Hz 100 11 Hz 1 0000 kHz 1Vp 0 01 10 counts 9989 kHz 1 0011 kHz 10 000 kHz t 0 01 10 counts 9 989 kHz 10 011 kHz 100 00 kHz 1Vp p 0 01 10 counts 99 89 kHz 100 11 kHz 1 0000 MHz12 1V5 0 15 10 counts 10 9975 MHz 1 0025 MHz 1 Select Frequency mode if u
179. eration Perform the following steps to verify the diode check accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to 2 Push the BLUE button to select the diode test mode 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Diode Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the capacitance measurement accuracy 1 Setthe multimeter dial to 4 2 Setthe noise suppression to 60 Hz a Press the DMM SETUP key repeatedly until the upper display reads 5060 b Set the main display to 60 Hz with the and keys 3 Null the residual DMM and lead capacitance offset a Using Fluke 5500A or Wavetek 9100 minus the 9105 front porch m Set the calibrator output to OFF m Connect the test leads to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM inputs m Connect the multimeter COM lead to the calibrator common output W Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key m Connect the multimeter C V Q4C lead to the remaining calibrator output m Set the calibrator output to ON b Using Wavetek 9100 with 9105 front porch Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification m Set the calibrator output to OFF m Connect the multimete
180. erification Procedure ess aeeie a n 6 Test Records sS ssi ed A A UR Ce S gis 8 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmocsorosososso 10 List of Adjustments sesane e e E e e n 10 Test Equipment 1 peace gia ere RR rr e Rer RENE E ed 10 Preparation for Adjustment o ooooooocoooor ee 11 Adjustment Procedure 0 00 cece eh 11 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service pU A DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters The DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters measure AC current AC voltage and resistance continuity The meters use a current transformer to measure current without opening the circuit The meters automatically select the correct measurement range and have a 4000 count resolution The maximum reading is 3990 The DCM320 meter provides true RMS readings for both AC volts and AC current Figure 1 DCM300 Digital Clamp Multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DCM300 and DCM320 Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 0 to 45 C ambient environment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the use
181. es Performance Verification 52 Constant Current Source Accuracy Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 With the power supply set to OUT 2 press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Set the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 5 0A OVP SET 22 V Repeat steps 5 through 14 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above but verify that the difference between I1 and I2 is lt 0 006 A Repeat steps 15 through 18 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 5 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5 0A OVP SET 7N Repeat steps 5 through 18 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Complete the following procedures to verify constant current source accuracy
182. es in the Perfor mance Verification section List of Adjustments Use the adjustments listed in Table 10 to return the DCM330 clamp meter to factory calibration Table 10 DCM330 Adjustments Position Eror AC Current DC Current Peak Hold Test Equipment The test equipment listed in Table 6 on page 6 is a complete list of equipment needed for the adjustment procedures These procedures assume that all test equipment is operating within tolerance Detailed operating instructions for test equipment are not given in this procedure If you need operating information refer to the instruction manual of the test equipment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DCM330 Adjustment Procedures Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DCM330 adjustments Adjustment Procedure 12 Open the Meter Case A Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less Before making any adjustment warm up the current meter for at least 30 minutes Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual You must open the meter case to gain access to the internal adjustments 1 2 Lay the meter face down on a flat work surface Remove the two screws from t
183. ess SHIFT gt STORE gt 2 to store the above values in the memory 02 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values set in step 21 for memory location 02 Repeat steps 6 through 12 above Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 1 V Press VOLTS Y and verify that as you attempt to decrease the voltage below 0 00 V Err 018 appears on the CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts The voltage should decrease in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press VOLTS A and verify that as you attempt to increase the voltage past 6 00 V Err 016 appears on readouts The voltage should increase in 1 volt steps on the VOLTS readout Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 1 A Press CURRENT Y and verify that as you attempt to decrease the current below 0 000 A Err 019 appears on the readouts and the C C indicator lights The current should decrease in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout Press CURRENT ZA and verify that as you attempt to increase the current past 5 100 A Err 017 appears on the readouts The current should increase in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout OCP Series and Parallel Mode Indicators Use the following steps to verify OCP series and parallel output indicator function 1 On the power supply front panel press OCP ON OFF to enable the OCP Verify that the OCP indicator lights up on the display Press OCP ON OFF Verify that the OCP ind
184. et s 18 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmocsorosocsooso 20 List of Adjustments assesi e E E e e n 20 Test Equipment 1 oeresvrem ere RH er e err eS Re 22 Preparation for Adjustment 20 2 0 cece e 23 Power Supply Adjustments 2 0 00 0 cee ees 26 Vertical Adjustments 0 2 0 cece ect n 29 Horizontal Adjustments 0 0 c cece eh 36 Trigger Adjustments 0 cece cette n 39 Probe Compensation 0 0 0 ccc eect teen nee eens 41 Cursors and Readout Adjustments 0 0 0 e cee eee eee 42 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Bep p ul TAS 200 Series Oscilloscopes The Tektronix TAS 220 and TAS 250 oscilloscopes are dual channel products with frequency bandwidths of DC to 20 MHz and DC to 50 MHz respectively Both oscilloscopes feature a maximum sensitivity of 1 mV division and a maximum sweep speed of 10 ns division In addition the TAS 200 series oscilloscopes offer the following features High beam transmission and high intensity CRT displays for clear waveforms at high sweep speeds High stability low drift temperature compensation circuits to reduce baseline and DC balance drift Trigger feature Set to 50 that eliminates triggering adjustments when displaying regular video and large duty cycle ratio signals Synchronization separator and trigger
185. et the multimeter dial to Hz 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 3 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Frequency Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the duty factor measurement accuracy Set the multimeter dial to Hz 2 Push the BLUE button to select duty factor 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 4 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Duty Factor Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Set the calibrator output to OFF Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter QO Check Perform the following steps to verify the resistance measurement accuracy in Q mode 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Q Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Q Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Low Voltage Q
186. ete cL40 Parallel Output Current Offset Calibration To calibrate the parallel output current offset perform the following steps 1 Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 2 Enter the DMM current reading on the power supply keypad and press lt The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 65 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures cL41 Parallel Output Current Full Scale Calibration To calibrate the parallel output full scale current perform the following steps 1 Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 2 Enter the DMM current reading on the power supply keypad and press The readout will return to normal when the calibration is complete 66 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix TAS 200 Series Oscilloscopes 070 9855 00 AA X Table of Contents TAS 200 Series Oscilloscopes eee 1 Specifications 24 Sie Siete e Sn EG cee ele ewe OS 2 Performance Verification eee 6 Test Equipmient 4 sci ude cA atin cen seh CD og VAR as Boa ae Slates Soc a CS 7 Set Ups cx deer s A E Pe ee ete ae hid Ae Benes 8 Vertical Check ii ia edn ERI EI e ep ete a 9 Horizontal Check ot oes sie ees REALE US eke 14 Trigger Check eek er Ch e TREES ale ERE n OR e E S AR 16 Cursor Check ink ERES EPI S E S
187. following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 7 8 Press SHIFT OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5 1 A OVP SET 7N Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 5 000 A Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 volts over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF then disable the electronic load Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage ripple and noise accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the oscilloscope and 27 Q 75 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 4 for details Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification Power supply Oscilloscope
188. ger Sensitivity Cursor Check AT Measurement Accuracy AV Measurement Accuracy Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 11 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 11 Performance Verification Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Leveled Sine Wave Generator 200 kHz to 250 MHz variable amplitude from 5 mV to 4 V into 50 Q Time Mark Generator Variable marker frequency from 10 ms to 10 ns accuracy within 2 ppm DC Calibration Generator DC voltage levels from 100 mV to 10 V Digital Multimeter 35 V 4A 0 1 Accuracy Termination two required 50 O female BNC input male BNC output Cable Coaxial 75 Q male to male BNC connectors 36 inch length Cable Precision Coaxial 50 O male to male BNC connectors 36 inch length Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Example Product Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibra
189. gh out of the top case to expose the adjustments See Figure 2 and the procedure that follows To reassemble the meter following the adjustments perform steps 2 through 4 above in reverse order To return your instrument to factory calibration implement the following procedures Use a small flat tipped screwdriver to make the adjustments Refer to Figure 2 for adjustment locations WARNING Magnetic fields are produced that may cause a malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Adjustment Procedures VR1 VR2 VR3 VR5 VR6 VR7 VR8 E ALILO bs Q ES Peak Hold VR9 Ee 8 veg S VR10 O e gt l S Figure 2 Adjustment Locations Short for Auto Zero dy o VR2 el o Short for Position Error The adjust the position error calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 380 A at 50 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Adjust VR1 to maintain the measurement er
190. guidelines listed below to avoid product damage CAUTION Static discharge can damage internal semiconductor components When performing service that requires internal access to an instrument adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal modules or their compo nents Avoid handling modules or components in areas that have floors or work surfaces capable of generating a static charge Spray carpeted work areas with a solution of equal parts of water and fabric softener Wear clothing made from materials that do not accumulate static charges Avoid Wool and some artificial fibers which build up static charges readily wear cotton which conducts electricity and resists static accumulation Minimize the handling of static sensitive devices Transport and store static sensitive devices in their protected containers or on a metal rail Label any package that contains static sensitive parts Service instruments and modules at grounded static free work stations Do not allow devices capable of generating a static charge on a work station surface Wear a grounding strap while working with static sensitive devices Handle circuit boards by their edges if possible Do not slide static sensitive components over any surface Do not use high velocity compressed air to clean or dry components or modules Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service vii Preventing Electrostatic Discharge viii Handheld and
191. hat the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3 1A OVP SET 7N Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 3 000 A Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 V over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns of then disable the electronic load Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Constant Voltage Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage ripple and noise Ripple and Noise accuracy Accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the oscilloscope and 27 Q 100 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 4 for details Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 25 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 26 Power supply Oscilloscope
192. he DC Ampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification 4 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter AC Ampere Check Perform the following steps to verify the AC ampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 2 Push the BLUE button to select AC mode 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM input connectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the AC Ampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM830 Test Records Serial Number Procedure performed by Date DMM830 Test Record AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 60 Hz 1 0 40 counts 3 5600 V 3 6400 V 1kHz 2 5 40 counts 3 5060 V 3 6940 V 36 000 V 1 0 40 counts 35 600 V 36 400 V 2 5 40 counts 35 060 V 36 940 V 360 00 V 60 Hz 1 0 40 counts 356 00 V 364 00 V 1 kHz 2 5 40 counts 350 60 V 369 40 V 750 0 V3 60 Hz 1 0 40 counts 738 5 V 761 5 V 1 Verify proper DMM range 5 display digits use manual range if necessary The 750 V range displays 4 digits The upp
193. he adjustments in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 104 F ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less m Before making any adjustment warm up the instrument for at least 20 minutes m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first m Do not alter any setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting You must remove the instrument cover to make internal adjustments WARNING To avoid electrical shock disconnect the power cord from its source while removing the instrument cover Following the adjustment procedure replace the instrument cover before using the power supply To remove the instrument cover refer to Figure 5 while performing the following steps 1 Remove the two handle mounting screws and remove the handle 2 Remove the three screws on the left side and the three screws on the right side of the instrument 3 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument and lift To reinstall the cover perform steps 1 through 3 above in reverse order Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Figure 5 PS280 PS283 Instrument Cover Removal Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Circuit Board Locations Refer to Figure 6 to locate PS280 PS283 internal circuit boards
194. he bottom case half with the slots in the top case half at the end of the meter near the input connectors and that the battery wires are not pinched CAUTION Before closing the case check that the rotary dial is properly aligned 3 4 Close the case snapping the case halves together Reinstall the three screws Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 39 DMMO091X Series Adjustment Procedures 40 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DTM500 Series Digital Thermometers 070 9852 00 AA ni Table of Contents DTM500 Series Digital Thermometers eese 1 Sp cifications vec zero rr e er yt tee Sn BG Reo ble aw er e 2 Performance Verification cee eee eee cece ences 5 Test Equipment Li cen CD og Aon as Boa a ea Sects 5 Set Ups oe ui veneta e CE OE E UNE eo ee Ri MERO eee 6 Verification Procedure 20 n 6 DIM510 Test Record iz cesse RR Re teg Rex eis 7 DTMS20 Test Record ii RR OSEE REUS 8 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmorsorososooso 10 List of Adjustments oooooooorrrr e n 10 Test Equipment 0 eee I n 10 Preparation for Adjustment 20 2 0 cece cece eh 11 DTM510 Adjustment Procedure ooooooooccocoor rr 13 DTM520 Adjustment Procedure 0 0 eee eee eee eens 15 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents
195. he calibrator to each of the values in the Volts Peak Hold Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the DC milliampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to mA 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter uA mA and COM input connectors 3 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the DC Milliampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 4 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the AC milliampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to mA z 2 Push the BLUE button to select AC mode 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter uA mA and COM input connectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the AC Milliampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the DC ampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM input connectors 3 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in t
196. he case bottom with a Phillips head screwdriver Gently lift the end of the case bottom until it unsnaps from the case top Remove the three screws that secure the circuit board assembly to the case top Do not remove the screws that secure the circuit boards to each other To access the adjustments lift the circuit board assembly far enough out of the top case to expose the adjustments See Figure 2 and the procedure that follows To reassemble the meter following the adjustments perform steps 2 through 4 above in reverse order To return your instrument to factory calibration implement the following procedures Use a small flat tipped screwdriver to make the adjustments Refer to Figure 2 for adjustment locations WARNING Magnetic fields are produced that may cause a malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Adjustment Procedures VR1 VR2 VR3 VR5 VR6 VR7 VR8 E ALILO bs Q ES Peak Hold VR9 Ee 8 veg S VR10 O e gt l S Figure 2 Adjustment Locations Short for Auto Zero dy o VR2 el o Short for Position Error The adjust the position error calibration perform the follo
197. he following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Set up the Variac Connect the power supply AC input to the Variac variable output Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 29 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 30 2 3 4 5 10 11 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and 27 Q 100 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 6 for details Digital multimeter Power supply E Resistor i Figure 6 Constant Current Source Test Setup Set the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 1 5A OVP SET 38 5 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220V range Verify that the DMM current variation is lt 0 003 A over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown
198. he ground connection for each adapter connects to the common or ground connector of its associated instrument 50 Q cable BNC to dual banana cable gt Voltage source BNC to dual banana adapter Figure 7 Vertical Accuracy Test Setup 2 Use the menus to set the THM500 series instrument CH 1 CPLG to DC then turn the menus off WARNING This test uses hazardous voltages If you use standard banana plugs to apply test signals to the THM500 series instrument do not touch the exposed conductors 3 For each row of Table 10 perform the following steps a Use the THM500 series instrument A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to the setting listed in the first column b Setthe voltage source output to the value in the second column c Press the THM500 series instrument POSITION SCALE button to show POS then use the A and Y buttons to move the waveform three divisions below the center of the graticule d Press the THM500 series instrument CURSORS TRIGGER button to show the cursors then use the A and Y buttons to move one cursor over the waveform e Setthe voltage source output to the value in the third column press the THM500 series instrument SELECT button to select the second cursor and position the second cursor over the new waveform position 18 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification f Observe the AV readout on the THM5
199. he instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your thermometer meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in Table 5 to return DTM900 and DTM920 thermom eters to factory calibration Table 5 DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustments DTM900 Adjustment Procedure DTM920 Adjustment Procedure 2000 mV Calibration Gain Calibration 0 C Calibration To ensure accurate adjustments use the following or equivalent test equipment If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the adjustment procedures Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures NOTE Before making any adjustment warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 6 Adjustment Test Equipment Description Minimum requirements Thermocouple Simulator 200 to1370 C 0 01 328 to 2498 F 0 01 DC Voltage Source DTM920 10 mV to 2 V 0 01 accuracy Thermocouple Extension K type thermocouple wire with Cable SMP male end connectors Transition Adapter DTM920 SMP female to male banana Omega TAS U 5
200. heck 0000 eee eens 7 Constant Current Ripple and Noise Check oooooooooooooooooooo 9 Constant Voltage Regulation Check 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 11 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmocsorososcsso 13 List of Adjustments sensan e e e e e n 13 Test Equipment sa a rre RR rr e E ER Eee 14 Preparation for Adjustment 2 0 0 cece eh 14 Independent Mode Adjustments lllellslleeeeelseese 17 Series Tracking Mode Adjustments 00 cece cee eee eee 19 Parallel Tracking Mode Adjustments 000 e cece cece eee 20 5 V Fixed Output Adjustments 2 0 0 c eee ene 21 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service EA Gp tt PS280 and PS283 Power Supplies The Tektronix PS280 and PS283 Laboratory DC Power Supplies are multifunc tion benchtop or portable instruments These regulated triple output power supplies provide one fixed 5 V 3 A output suitable for powering logic circuits and two variable 0 to 30 V outputs useful in a wide variety of test and exper imental uses The current output of the PS280 varies from 0 to 2 A The current output of the PS283 varies from 0 to 1 A In all other respects the instruments are identical Unless otherwise noted descriptions and procedures in this manual apply to both instruments The front panel switches provide three modes of
201. henever its accuracy or function is in question The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 80 m The instrument warms up for 60 minutes m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 4 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 4 Performance Verification Test Equipment Description Example Product Thermocouple Simulator 200 to1370 C 0 01 Wavetek 9100 Universal 328 to 2498 F 0 01 Calibration System or Fluke 5500A Calibrator Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DTM500 Series Performance Verification Set Up To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following 1 Warm up the thermometer for 60 minutes 2 Photo
202. his manual or in an optional service manual please contact your Tektronix Service Center for additional information For product warranty information refer to the user manual supplied with your instrument Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service ix Preface Contacting Tektronix Product For application oriented questions about a Tektronix measure Support ment product call toll free in North America 1 800 TEK WIDE 1 800 835 9433 ext 2400 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time Or contact us by e mail tm app supp tek com For product support outside of North America contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office Service Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office Or visit Support our web site for a listing of worldwide service locations http www tek com For other In North America information 1 800 TEK WIDE 1 800 835 9433 An operator will direct your call To write us Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 X Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters 070 9847 00 AA ni Table of Contents DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters 1 Sp cifications 1 51 eee es 2 Performance Verification leeren 5 Test Bquipmient Li cen E RUD og AUR as Bia a Soc aS 5 Set Ups oi sd eese n P CE OE UNE REGE Ri MERO eee 6 V
203. hts up on the power supply display Record the DMM current reading I1 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the wire connect ing the power supply OUTPUT terminal to the electronic load terminal Move the electronic load connection to the power supply OUTPUT terminal Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Record the DMM current reading again I2 Verify that the difference between I1 and 12 is lt 0 003 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press OCP ON OFF Verify that the OCP indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the power supply readouts display the error message Err 012 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press OCP ON OFF to return the power supply to normal operation Verify that the OCP indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 5 Repeat steps 4 through 18 above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Ve
204. iable outputs providing 0 to 20 V at 0 to 2 5 A and one variable output providing 0 to 6 V at 0 to 5 A m The PS2520G and PS2521G include General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB operation 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The power supply operates in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 86 F ambient environment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Table 1 Operational Characteristics Characteristic Description Independent Output Ratings P52520 and PS2520G Two outputs 0 to 36 Vat0to 1 5 A One output 0to6Vat3A P52521 and PS2521G Two outputs 0 to 20 V at0 to 2 5 A One output Oto 6V at0 to 5A Series Tracking Output R ating PS2520 and PS2520G 0to 72 V at0 to 1 5 A PS2521 and PS2521G 0 to 40 V at0 to 2 5 A Parallel Tracking Output R ating PS2520 and PS2520G 0to36Vat0to3A P52521 and PS2521G 0to20Vat0to5A Maximum O vervoltage Protection P52520 and PS2520G 36 V outputs 38 5 V 6V output 7 0V P52521 and PS2521G 20 V outputs 22 5 V 6 V output 7 0V Load Effect Voltage Rear output lt 3 mV Front output lt 6 mV Current lt 3 mA lt 6 mA if rating current gt 3 5 A
205. iance voltages typical 1 V Q setting 0 4 V LV setting Continuity threshold Beeper sounds when resistance is approximately 75 Q or less Diode test3 Test current typical 0 6 mA Test voltage typical lt 3V Capacitance Ranges 4 nF 40 nF 400 nF 4 pF 40 uF 400 pF 4 mF 40 mF Accuracy 96 10 count 4 nF to 4 uF 1 delta mode 40 uF to 40 mF 3 Frequency4 Ranges 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz 2 MHz Accuracy 10 count 400 Hz to 400 kHz 0 01 2 MHz 0 15 Sensitivity 0 5 Vp p Duty factor Accuracy 0 1 0 05 per kHz for 5 V input Range 15 Hz to 10 kHz 10 to 90 duty factor Temperature Range 50 to 4980 C Accuracy 2 C Thermocouple type K Peak measurements Accuracy DC volts 5 40 counts of the peak value of a single 1 ms pulse 1 Divide counts by 10 in 4000 count mode 2 750 V 40 MQ LV range unspecified 3 4000 count mode only Upper display readout is limited to 10 kHz with reduced accuracy 5 gt 10 range 4 V range gt 1 V 6 35 range Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DMMO091X Series Specifications Table 4 Physical Characteristics Characteristic Description Dimensions Without holster 32 mm x 86 mm x 185 mm H x W x D Weight With battery 370 g 13 oz With battery and holster 600 g 21 2 02 Table 5 Environmental Characteristic Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 0 to 50 C Nonoperating storag
206. iation certified to Standard CSA 1010 1 Standard UL3111 1 for Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Testing Equipment and IEC 1010 2 032 particular requirements for hand held current clamps for electrical measurement and test Examples of Products in this Category Distribution level mains fixed installation Local level mains appliances portable equipment Signal levels in special equipment or parts of equipment telecommunications electronics Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be present Certifications Category CAT Ill CAT II CAT Overvoltage Category Pollution Degree 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Specifications Table 4 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F 7596 relative humidity Nonoperating 20 to 460 C 4 to 140 F 8096 relative humidity Temperature Coefficient 0 2 specified accuracy per C at 18 C 64 F or 228 C 82 F Maximum Altitude Operating 2 200 m 7 218 ft 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters perform as warranted If an instrument fails any of the checks it needs adjustment and or repair The performance verificati
207. icator turns off Press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure the power supply outputs for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure the power supply outputs for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 5 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP again to reconfigure the outputs for indepen dent operation Verify that the PARA and SERIES indicators turn off Set GPIB Use the following steps to check the GPIB address 1 2 3 Press LOCAL Enter a GPIB address 0 to 30 and press Press SHIFT gt ADDRESS Verify that the address entered in step 2 above appears on the readout for about one second Voltage Set Accuracy Complete the following procedures to verify voltage setting and readout accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 9 10 11 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V OVP SET 22 V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 25 VDC across the front panel OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator ligh
208. ification Procedure The following checks verify the performance of your DCM330 meter i WARNING The following procedures produce magnetic fields that may cause a malfunction in heart pacemakers or damage to sensitive equipment AC Current Check To check the AC current accuracy perform the following steps 1 Set the meter function to AC 2 Select the appropriate coils as necessary to multiply the AC Current calibrator output to each of the test values given in Table 7 on page 9 For more information refer to the user manual of your calibrator 3 Position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed 4 Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits and record the reading 5 Disconnect the calibrator 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Performance Verification DC Current Check To check the DC current accuracy perform the following steps 1 2 Set the meter function to DC In the absence of any magnetic fields press the DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the meter Select the appropriate coil s as necessary to multiply the DC Current calibrator output to each of the test values given in Table 8 on page 10 For more information refer to the user manual of your calibrator Position the clamp around the current loop of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ens
209. igure 2 Constant Voltage Load Test Setup 3 Set the DMM to measure 40 VDC 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 1 55 A OVP SET 38 5 V 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 6 Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 1 500 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Record the DMM voltage V1 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 6 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the OUTPUT 1 terminals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configura tion and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repea
210. imeter CV O4 input Set the calibrator output to ON 3 Set the calibrator to output 300 nF Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures We GE cx omo lm e Adjust VR2 until the display shows 299 9 to 300 1 nF Set the calibrator to output 1 000 uF Adjust VR3 until the display shows 0 999 to 1 001 uF Set the calibrator to output 100 0 uF Adjust VR1 until the display shows 99 9 to 100 1 uF Turn the calibrator output off 10 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Temperature Perform the following steps to adjust the temperature calibration DMM914 and DMM916 e A moo UA Set the multimeter dial to C F Connect the thermocouple adapter ATKO1 to the C V O4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Set the calibrator to output 18 6 C Connect a K type thermocouple from the calibrator output to the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter Allow five minutes of settling time for a stable reading Adjust VR4 until the display shows 18 5 to 18 7 C Turn the calibrator output off Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter DC Milliamperes Perform the following steps to adjust the DC milliamperes calibration 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to mA zx Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the yA mA and COM input connec tors of the multimeter Set calibrator to output 100 0 mA Press and hold the gold button for five seconds The
211. ine Test e Motor Test e Automotive preconfigured test setups e Vertical Mathematics capability e Invert capability Measurements Voltage Measurement e Timing Measurement e Power Measurement e THDF Measurement e Automotive Measurements preconfigured test setups e Table 2 DMM Specifications 550 560 565 General Resolution 334 digit 4000 count full scale reading except as noted e Input Impedance Typical VDC or VAC 10 MO 10 pF 70 pF at 400 mV range e Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 THM500 Series Specifications Table 2 DMM Specifications Cont 550 560 565 General Additional Readouts l Minimum voltage or resistance e Maximum voltage or resistance Difference between MAX and MIN Value ofthe main reading when the HOLD button is pressed Difference between HOLD reading and active reading DC Voltage Range and Resolution Resolution e 0 1 mV 1mV 10 mV 100 mV 1V Autorange available selects from all ranges except 400 mV Accuracy 0 5 of reading 5 counts Normal Mode Rejection gt 60 dB typical atuser selectable 50 or 60 Hz Common Mode R ejection gt 100 dB typical atuser selectable 50 or 60 Hz AC Voltage Range and Resolution True RMS Resolution o 0 1 mV 1mV 10 mV 100 mV 1V Autorange not available on 400 0 mV range Accuracy 2 of reading 5 counts for 50 or 60 Hz sine wave Add 2 of reading plus 5 counts for
212. ing RESET ALL 14 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification Oscilloscope Verification Noise The following checks verify the performance of the oscilloscope functions The DMM checks begin on page 12 NOTE The THM575 can display the menus in more than one language The language selections are located in the Utility menu The following check verifies an acceptable noise level 1 Set the THM500 series instrument to SCOPE mode If necessary press the SELECT button to point to CH 1 2 Use a patch cord to short the THM500 series instrument COM and CH 1 inputs as shown in Figure 4 Patch cord COM CH1 SID Figure 4 Noise Test Setup 3 Press the SCALE button until the readout in the lower right corner indicates SCALE then use the A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to 10 mV div 4 Use the menus to set the sampling mode to SPIKE DETECT then turn off the menus 5 Verify that the displayed peak to peak signal is less than 0 5 divisions 5 mV p p 6 If your THMS500 series instrument is equipped with two channels repeat steps 2 through 5 above for CH 2 7 Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 THM500 Series Performance Verification Input Leakage Trace Shift 16 Time Base Accuracy The following check verifies an acceptable input leakage trace shift 1 Use the THM500 series instrument menus to set
213. instrument warms up in the ambient environment for at least one hour m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The DCM330 performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks AC Current Check DC Current Check Frequency Check Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DCM330 Performance Verification Table 6 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product AC DC Current Calibrator gt 0 5 accuracy 0 to 400 A Wavetek 9100 with Option 50 7 accuracy 400 to 1000 A 200 current multiplier coils Set Up To prepare for the performance verification checks do the following 1 Turn the DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter on 2 Warm up the meter for 20 minutes 3 Photocopy the Test Records on pages 9 and 10 Use them to record your test results Ver
214. ion the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR7 until the display reads 400 Remove the clamp meter from the coil Peak Hold To adjust the peak hold calibration perform the following steps 1 E SNS GB ere m c 11 12 13 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Short the Peak Hold points indicated in Figure 2 Press PEAK HOLD to activate the function Adjust VR9 until the display reads 00 0 Remove the short Press PEAK HOLD to cancel the function Press PEAK HOLD again to verify that the display reads 00 0 Press PEAK HOLD to cancel the function Repeat steps 2 through 8 above until the display reads 00 0 Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 200 A at 400 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR10 until the display reads 200 0 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DCM330 Adjustment Procedures 14 Remove the clamp meter from the coil 15 Reassemble the meter Table 11 Summary of Adjustments Adjustment Circuit Name Mode Test Value Frequency Location Tolerance Display Min Display Max Position Error AC 380 A 50 Hz VRI 5 counts 0
215. itch in and disengage the right TRACKING mode switch switch out so that the power supply is in the SERIES operating mode Set the SLAVE CURRENT control to midrange Set the MASTER VOLTAGE control to minimum fully counterclockwise Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 16 mV Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the MASTER output and note the reading obtained Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the SLAVE output Adjust VR306 Master Slave circuit board until the voltage output of the SLAVE output matches the reading obtained from the MASTER output Set the MASTER VOLTAGE control to maximum fully clockwise Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC voltage of 35 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures 10 11 12 13 14 J 3082 Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the MASTER output and note the reading obtained Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the SLAVE output Adjust VR501 Front Panel Controls circuit board until the voltage of the SLAVE output matches the reading obtained from the MASTER output in step 10 above Recheck the value of the MASTER output compared to the value of the SLAVE output Readjust VR501 if the outputs do not match Disconnect the test setup VR501 Figure 9 Front Panel Contr
216. ked in the performance verification procedures Table 1 General Characteristics Characteristic Description Product Measurement Range DTM510 50 to 1300 C 58 to 1999 F DTM520 K type probe 200 to 1370 C 328 to 2498 F DTM520 J type probe 200 to 760 C 328 to 1400 F Accuracy Resolution of Reading DTM510 01 C 0 2 1 C 5 t 30 F OF 0 2 2 F Ir 8035 4 F 200 togeggec wc 50486 2 C TSF 392 to 1831 F 0 4 4 F 1000 to 1300 C ISC 0 6 2 C 1832 to 1999 F TSE 0 6 4 F JH e op o 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM500 Series Specifications Table 1 General Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Accuracy Resolution of Reading DTM520 K type probe 01 C 0 3 1 C 328 to 148 F 0 2 F 0 3 2 F 99 9 to 999 9 C 0 1 C 0 1 0 7 C 147 9 to 999 9 F 0 2 F 0 1 1 4 F 1000 to 1370 C 1 C 0 3 1 C 1000 to 2498 F 2 F 0 3 2 F T1 T2 reading 0 3 2 2 C Accuracy Temperature Range Resolution of Reading DTM520 J type probe Table 2 General Characteristics Characteristic Temperature Range Probe Tolerance Measurement Rate R eadings second DTM510 DTM520 T2 or T1 DTM520 T1 T2 Input P rotection Electrical Isolation T1 to T2 200 to 100 C 0 19 C 0 3 1 1 C 328 to 148
217. ks Calibrator Output Test Frequency Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit Y fov o EEN E 10 0 V 10 6 100 0 V 101 7 400 V 410 600 V 612 612 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Performance Verification Table 9 Resistance Checks Resistance Calibrator Output 00 9 0 000 Q Low Limit Test Result High Limit 009 Q Buzzer must sound 1200 11 O 1090 131 0 Buzzer must sound 1 000 kQ 3 700 KQ 3 617 KQ 1 029 kQ 3 783 KQ 39 00 KQ 38 13 kQ 39 87 KQ Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures List of Adjustments Test Equipment 10 This section contains procedures to adjust DCM300 and DCM320 Digital Clamp Multimeters If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the following information m A list of adjustments m A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your multimeter meets factory specifications implement the procedures in the Performance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in Table 10 to return DCM300 and DCM32
218. lay shows 299 9 to 300 1 nF Set the calibrator to output 1 000 uF Adjust VR3 until the display shows 0 999 to 1 001 uF Set the calibrator to output 100 0 uF Adjust VR1 until the display shows 99 9 to 100 1 uF Turn the calibrator output off 10 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Temperature Perform the following steps to adjust the temperature calibration DMM850 and DMM870 e A moo UA Set the multimeter dial to C F Connect the thermocouple adapter ATKO1 to the C V O4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Set the calibrator to output 18 6 C Connect a K type thermocouple from the calibrator output to the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter Allow five minutes of settling time for a stable reading Adjust VR4 until the display shows 18 5 to 18 7 C Turn the calibrator output off Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter DC Milliamperes Perform the following steps to adjust the DC milliamperes calibration 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to mA zx Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the yA mA and COM input connec tors of the multimeter Set calibrator to output 100 0 mA Press and hold the gold button for five seconds The multimeter beeps twice when the gold button is first pressed and then two more beeps follow after five seconds Press the SETUP button and wait for the calibration to finish CAL is displayed during the calibration After the calibration is
219. librator to each of the values in the Q Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Low Voltage Q Check Perform the following steps to verify the resistance measurement accuracy in LV mode 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Q Push the BLUE button to select the LV mode Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Low Voltage Q Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Continuity Check Perform the following steps to verify the continuity check accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Continuity Test record and verify proper operation Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DMM91X Series Performance Verification 14 Diode Check Capacitance Check 6 Insert the multimeter test leads into the C V Q4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter 7 Shortthe test leads together and check for proper op
220. ment Procedure This section describes how to adjust the DTM520 thermometer To properly adjust the thermometer perform the following steps in sequential order Figure 3 shows the location of the test and adjustment points 1 2 3 Open the thermometer See page 12 for instructions Solder a jumper across R25 Turn on the thermometer and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes 2000 mV Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a 2000 mV calibration 1 2 3 Press T2 once to access the T2 mode Install a jumper across the test points marked JP1 Connect the DC voltage source to the T1 probe connector The composition of both lead wires should be identical Set the DC voltage source output to 2000 0 mV 30 0146 Adjust VR2 until the display shows 2000 0 The first digit of the temperature appears at the upper right hand corner of the display Disconnect the DC voltage source Remove the R25 jumper Do not remove the JP1 jumper Gain Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a gain calibration 1 2 3 Press C F until 1L appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Set the DC voltage source output to 50 000 mV 0 01 Reconnect the DC voltage source to the T1 probe connector Adjust VR3 until the display shows 000 0 The first digit of the tempera ture appears at the upper right hand corner of the display Disconnect the DC voltage source Remove the JP1
221. midity of 75 or less m Warm up the thermometer for at least 30 minutes m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first m Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual NOTE Thermocouple connectors are temperature sensitive For best measure ment accuracy do not touch the connector contacts and minimize handling of the connector housings Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DTM500 Series Adjustment Procedures 12 Open the Thermometer To make internal adjustments you must open the thermometer case and remove the circuit board see Figure 2 or Figure 3 1 2 Unplug the thermocouple s Lay the thermometer face down on a flat work surface Remove the single screw from the battery compartment cover with a Phillips head screwdriver and remove the battery compartment cover Remove the four screws from the corners of the thermometer Lift the top end of the cover and remove both the cover and the cap Remove the screws from the corners of the circuit board the DTM510 thermometer has three screws the DTM520 thermometer has four and gently lift the circuit board out of the case Remove the rubber keypad from the case Lay the circuit board face up Place the rubber keypad on the circuit board so it can be used to operate the thermometer To reassem
222. minals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 50 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 10 11 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Set the DMM to measure 40 VDC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 3 1A OVP SET 38 5 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 3 000 A Record the DMM voltage V1 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 6 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals a
223. mode for this test Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 kQ 0 6 1 count 3 577 KQ 3 623 kQ 36 00 KQ 30 696 1 count 35 77 KQ 36 23 KQ 360 0 KQ 0 6 1 count 357 7 KQ 362 3 KQ 3 600 MQ 0 6 1 count 3577 MQ hd 3 623 MQ 1 4000 count mode only 2 Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6kQ Continuity Test 0 00 Beeper sounds 150Q Beeper does not sound EE Multimeter Leads Shorted Beeper sounds Diode Test 0 5V 0 400 V 0 600 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 29 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM916 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Capacitance Testi 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 1 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 646 UF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 UF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF3 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF3 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Setthe DMM to Delta mode Delta mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions Temperature Test 0 09 C 2 0 40 0 C 38 0 100 0 C 102 0 950 0 C T2250 948 0 952 0
224. multimeter beeps twice when the gold button is first pressed and then two more beeps follow after five seconds Press the SETUP button and wait for the calibration to finish CAL is displayed during the calibration After the calibration is completed press EXIT SETUP blue button Turn the calibrator output off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 37 DMMO091X Series Adjustment Procedures DC Amperes Adjustments Part 2 38 AC Response 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to adjust the DC amperes calibration 1 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM inputs Set calibrator to output 10 00 A O Press and hold the gold button for five seconds The multimeter beeps twice when the gold button is first pressed and then two more beeps follow after five seconds 5 Press the SETUP button and wait for the calibration to finish CAL is displayed during the calibration After the calibration is completed press EXIT SETUP blue button 6 Turn the calibrator output off 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter To perform the following procedure you must lift out the entire circuit board assembly from the top case half to access the adjustments Perform this proce dure only if the Performance Verification procedure indicates that the AC voltage accuracy checks above 60 Hz is out of specification
225. nana cable Time Mark generator Figure 6 Time Base Accuracy Test Setup 3 Set the time mark generator for 1 us markers 4 On the THM500 series instrument press the POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows SCALE in the lower right corner Use the A and Y buttons to set the vertical scale to 200 mV div Use the 4 and buttons to set the time base to 1 us div 5 Use the THM500 series instrument menus to set CH 1 CPLG to DC then turn the menus off 6 Press the THM500 series instrument CURSORS TRIGGER button until the readout shows TRIG in the lower right corner then use the A and Y buttons to set the trigger level to one division above the bottom of the displayed signal Use the or button to set the trigger to rising edge 7 Press the THM500 series instrument POSITION SCALE button until the readout shows POS in the lower right corner then use the button to set the trigger position to 10 8 Verify that the THM500 series instrument rising edge of the fifth time mark is within one pixel of the center vertical graticule line measured at one division above the bottom of the displayed signal 9 Disconnect the test setup Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 THM500 Series Performance Verification Vertical Accuracy The following check verifies vertical accuracy 1 Connect the voltage source output to the THM500 series instrument CH 1 and COM inputs as shown in Figure 7 Assure that t
226. nd connect them to the OUTPUT 2 terminals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configura tion and polarities shown in Figure 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 22 12 13 14 15 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Set the DMM to measure 10 VDC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3 1A OVP SET 7N Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 3 000 A Record the DMM voltage V 1 Turn off the electronic load and record the DMM voltage again V2 Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is
227. nding OUTPUT 3 and terminals Press lt on the power supply keypad Verify that the power supply readout displays cL10 voltage offset calibration Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press Verify that the power supply readout displays cL11 indicating voltage full scale calibration Adjust VR401 for a DMM reading of 6 5 V See Figure 14 for the adjust ment location OO 4 LJ JO O 4 Instrument front Figure 14 VR401 Adjustment Location 62 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press Verify that the power supply readout displays cL20 indicating current offset calibration Configure the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press Verify that the power supply readout displays cL2F indicating that the current offset calibration is complete Set the DMM to the 10 A range and press on the power supply Verify that the power supply readout displays cL21 indicating current full scale calibration Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press lt Verify that the power supply readout displays cL2F indicating that the current full scale calibration is complete
228. ndwidth To check DC coupled bandwidth accuracy perform the following steps 1 Use the 50 Q precision coaxial cable to connect the output of the leveled sine wave generator to the 50 Q termination then connect the 50 Q termination to the TAS 200 series oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 input See Figure 3 below Leveled Sine Wave Generator Precision cable 50 Q Termination Figure 3 Bandwidth Check Setup 2 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 1 mV HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 10 us TRIGGER MODE AUTO TRIGGER COUPLING DC TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 2 GND Out release 3 To confirm the bandwidth of the input channel perform the following substeps a through c at the settings and limits noted in Table 14 a Setthe oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control as indicated b Setthe leveled sine wave generator to the specified 50 kHz reference amplitude c Verify that the oscilloscope display amplitude remains greater than the bandwidth minimum amplitude minimum number of divisions while increasing the leveled sine wave generator frequency to the specified value for the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV setting and oscilloscope model Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification NOTE At lower VOLTS DIV settings you might need to set TRIGGER COU PLING to HF REJ to minimize noise
229. nectors 4 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Diode Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the capacitance measurement accuracy 1 Setthe multimeter dial to 4 2 Setthe noise suppression to 60 Hz a Press the DMM SETUP key repeatedly until the upper display reads 5060 b Set the main display to 60 Hz with the and keys 3 Null the residual DMM and lead capacitance offset a Using Fluke 5500A or Wavetek 9100 minus the 9105 front porch m Set the calibrator output to OFF m Connect the test leads to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM inputs m Connect the multimeter COM lead to the calibrator common output W Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key m Connect the multimeter C V Q4C lead to the remaining calibrator output m Set the calibrator output to ON b Using Wavetek 9100 with 9105 front porch Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification m Set the calibrator output to OFF m Connect the multimeter test leads to the calibrator outputs m Connect the calibrator common lead to the multimeter COM input W Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key m Connect the remaining calibrator output lead to the multimeter CV O4 inpu
230. nge 400 mV Accuracy 96 10 counts DMM830 DMM850 DMM870 0 2 0 1 0 06 AC voltage Ranges 4 V 40 V 400 V 750 V Accuracy 96 40 counts DMM830 DMM850 DMM870 50 to 100 Hz 1 0 0 8 0 7 gt 100 to 1 kHz 2 5 2 0 1 5 gt 1 kHz to 10 kHz 3 5 2 5 gt 10 kHz to 20 kHz 13 59 Bandwidth DMM830 DMM850 DMM870 1kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz Crest factor lt 3 Input impedance AC DC volts dBm dB Current AC and DC ranges DC accuracy 10 counts AC accuracy 80 counts Bandwidth typical Resistance Ranges Q ranges LV ranges Accuracy Q 96 10 counts 10 MO paralleled by 100 pF Same as AC RMS 1 2 10 counts dBm reference 1 mV into 600 Q dB reference 1 V 4 000 pA 400 mA 10 A 20A maximum for 30 seconds DMM830 DMM850 DMM870 1 kHz 400 Q 4 KQ 40 KQ 400 KO 4 MO 40 MO 4kQ 40 KQO 400kO 4MQ 40 MQ DMM830 DMM850 DMM870 10 590 0 4 0 3 LV 96 1 count 23 1 0 8 30 696 4MQ 400 Q range 1 0 8 0 6 40 MQ range 5 5 5 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS800 Series Specifications Table 3 Measurement Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Compliance voltages typical 1 V Q setting 0 4 V LV setting Continuity threshold Beeper sounds when resistance is approximately 75 Q or less Diode test3 Test current typical 0 6 mA Test voltage typical lt 3V Capacitance Ranges 4 nF 40 n
231. ns Table 2 General Specifications Characteristic LCD display digits Bargraph segments Display count Numeric update rate Bargraph Polarity display Overrange display Low voltage indicator Automatic power off time Power source Maximum input voltage Maximum floating voltage Maximum input current Maximum open circuit voltage Overload protection pA mA connector A connector The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment at less than 75 relative humidity m The batteries are adequately charged the battery indicator does not display NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Description 43 4 or 33 40 40 000 or 4 000 1 time sec 40 000 count 4 times sec 4 000 count 20 times sec Automatic OL is displayed Battery indicator User selectable default 15 minutes One 9 V dry cell battery 1000 V 750 V AC CAT II between V and COM 1000 V 750 V AC CAT II between any terminal and earth ground 400 mA between uA mA and COM 10 A continuous between A and COM 20 A for 30 seconds Current inputs 600 V between A and COM and between A mA and COM 1A 600 V fastblow fuse 15 A 600 V fastblow fuse V connector MOUVy V V AC DC 850V mV Hz Q c 4 Handheld
232. o 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 1498 and 0 2500 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V OVP SET 22 V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 25 VDC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 19 965 and 20 035 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 20 00 VDC Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 37 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 38 Current Set Accuracy 10 11 12 13 14 Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 19 965 and 20 035 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 2 terminals Verify that the DMM reads
233. o adjust the trigger DC offset 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows CH 1 CH 2 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange VERTICAL MODE CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CH 1 CH 2 AC DC HORIZONTAL SEC DIV TRIGGER COUPLING TRIGGER SOURCE CH1 CH2 10 mV CAL AC l ms AC CH 1 CH 2 2 Connect a 50 kHz sine wave to the CH 1 CH 2 input Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform eight divisions in amplitude on the display 3 Rotate the TRIGGER LEVEL control to set the trigger point at the center of the signal swing 4 Alternate the TRIGGER COUPLING control between the AC and DC positions Adjust VR110 VR210 until the oscilloscope triggers at the same amplitude for both switch positions See Figure 8 for the adjustment location 5 Setthe VERTICAL MODE and TRIGGER SOURCE to CH2 and repeat steps 2 through 4 for channel 2 Use the following procedure to adjust the trigger slope balance 1 Setup the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CH 1 AC DC CH 1 GND HORIZONTAL SEC DIV Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service CH1 AC In l ms 39 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures TRIGGER SET TO 50 In TRIGGER SLOPE Falling push switch in Use a DMM to measure the collector voltage of Q414 Adjust VR403 for a reading of 1 40 V 0 02 V See Figure 10 for the adjustment location Set the CH 1 GND push switch to the out position Connect a 50 kHz sine wave to the CH 1 input Adj
234. oduct is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product you are using Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Replace Batteries Properly Replace batteries only with the proper type and rating specified Recharge Batteries Properly Recharge batteries for the recommended charge cycle only Use Proper AC Adapter Use only the AC adapter specified for the product you are using Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service iii General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms A A Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate these products with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for the product you are using Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock do not operate these products in wet or damp conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate these products in an explosive atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry To avoid electric shock and erroneous readings keep probe surfaces clean and dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the
235. ols Circuit Board Adjustments Parallel Tracking Mode Adjustments 20 PARALLEL Tracking Refer to Figures 6 and 7 for the circuit board and adjustment locations used in this procedure To adjust the PARALLEL tracking Mode perform the following steps 1 Disengage both TRACKING mode switches both switches out so that the power supply is in the INDEPendent operating mode Set the MASTER VOLTAGE and CURRENT controls to minimum fully counterclockwise Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of 4 A Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the MASTER output Set the MASTER VOLTAGE control to midrange and adjust the MASTER CURRENT control until a reading of 1 A PS283 or 2 A PS280 is displayed on the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures NOTE Do not readjust the CURRENT control setting through the remainder of this procedure 6 Engage both TRACKING switches both switches in so that the power supply is in the PARALLEL operating mode 7 Setthe SLAVE CURRENT control to maximum fully clockwise and set the SLAVE VOLTAGE control to midrange 8 Adjust VR502 Master Slave circuit board until a reading of 2 A PS283 or 4 A PS280 is displayed on the multimeter 9 Disconnect the test setup 5 V Fixed Output Adjustments 5 V Output Refer to Figures 6 and 10 for the circuit board and adjustment locations use
236. on SLAVE Voltage Regulation 5 V Fixed Voltage Regulation 12 Table 9 Load Resistor Values for Voltage Checks PS280 PS283 Mode RL RL INDEP 15 O 70W 30 Q 40 W SERIES 30 Q 140 W 60 Q 70 W PARALLEL 7 5 0 140 W 15 0 70 W 5V FIXED 17 Q 20W 17 Q 20W The following check verifies the SLAVE voltage regulation performance 1 Set the power supply to the INDEP operating mode by disengaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches out Set up the digital multimeter to measure 30 VDC Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the and terminals of the SLAVE output as shown in Figure 4 See Table 9 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that you can adjust the power supply from 0 to 30 V The following check verifies the 5 V fixed voltage regulation performance Set up the digital multimeter to measure 5 VDC Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the 5V FIXED 3A terminals Use the test setup illustrated in Figure 4 See Table 9 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that the power supply maintains an output of 5 V 0 25 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Procedures This section contains procedures to adjust PS280 and PS283 power supplies If your instrument fails a performance requirement use these procedures to return it to factory specifications In this section you will find the
237. on other than OFF NOTE You need to keep the multimeter powered on throughout the warm up period and throughout the entire verification procedure Set the auto power off time to a large value or disable the auto power off by pushing the Blue button when turning the dial from the OFF position 3 Warm up the multimeter for five minutes 4 Setthe Digits to the 40 000 counts display 5 Pages 18 through 31 contain Test Records for the DMM91X series multime ters Each model has 1ts own test record Photocopy the Test Records pages for your model and use them to record your test results NOTE If stability of the display reading causes questionable accuracy of a test set the multimeter to Average mode Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification Verification Procedure Implement the following checks to verify the performance of your DMM91X Series multimeter N WARNING To avoid electric shock avoid touching exposed connections AC Volts Check Perform the following steps to verify the AC voltage measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the AC Volts Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrat
238. on procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 7596 m The instrument warms up for 20 minutes m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The DCM300 and DCM320 performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks AC Current Check AC Voltage Check Resistance and Continuity Check Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 DCM300 and DCM320 Performance Verification Table 6 Test Equipment Description Minimum Requirements Example Product AC Current Calibrator gt 0 5 accuracy 0 to 400 A Wavetek 9100 with option 200 gt 0 7 accuracy 400 to 600 A Sa HA ep AC Voltage Calibr
239. on the display 13 Repeat steps 2 through 11 above to measure the OUTPUT 2 current setting and readout accuracy Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 9 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET SA OVP SET 7N Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC across the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 4 980 and 5 020 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT Y to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 5 000 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 4 980 and 5 020 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A 10 Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A 11 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Parallel Operation Use the following steps to the check parallel mode accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10V CURRENT SET 2 5A OVP SET 11V Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 39 PS2520 Series Perform
240. only 2 Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6kQ Continuity Test 0 00 Beeper sounds 150Q Beeper does not sound EE Multimeter Leads Shorted Beeper sounds Diode Test 0 5V 0 400 V 0 600 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 29 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM670 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Capacitance Testi 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 1 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 646 UF 36 00 uF 3 10 counts 34 82 UF 37 18 uF 360 00 uF3 3 10 counts 348 2 uF 371 8 uF 3 600 mF 3 10 counts 3 482 mF 3 718 mF 36 00 mF 3 10 counts 34 82 mF 37 18 mF 1 Variations in test equipment can cause erroneous readings Use a fixed value capacitance standard if instability occurs Setthe DMM to Delta mode Delta mode removes stray capacitance for low capacitance measurements 3 Set the DMM noise suppression to 60 Hz with the SETUP mode See Page 14 for detailed instructions Temperature Test 0 09 C 2 0 40 0 C 38 0 100 0 C 102 0 950 0 C T2250 948 0 952 0 Volts Peak Hold Test 1 Vnus 60 Hz MAX 5 40 counts 1524V 1414 Vp 1 Vnus 60 Hz MIN 5 40 counts 1 524V 1 303V 1414 Vj DC Milliampere Test 10 counts 1 0 pA 1 0 pA 0
241. operation for the PS280 and PS283 power supplies m Independent mode the output voltage and current of each supply is controlled independently W Series mode the variable outputs are connected in series and the controls of the MASTER power supply adjust the voltages or currents of both supplies Series mode allows the supplies to vary from 0 to 60 V at 0 to 2 A for the PS280 and 0 to 60 V at 0 to 1 A for the PS283 m Parallel mode the variable outputs are connected in parallel and the controls of the MASTER power supply adjust the voltages or currents of both supplies Parallel mode allows the supplies to vary from 0 to 4 A at 0 to 30 V for the PS280 and 0 to 2 A at 0 to 30 V for the PS283 Tektronix PS 280 DC Power Supply CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT VOLTAGE 4 ne 8 4 seres M PARALLEL Mb CC CV CC CVM O O OO JK TRACKING JU MASTER 0 30V 2A 0 30V 2A 5V FIXED 3A POWER SLAVE ON to 0109 000 009 Figure 1 PS280 DC Power Supply Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 PS280 and PS283 Specifications Specifications Table 1 Operational Characteristi Characteristic Outputs Voltage 5 V Fixed Supply Voltage 0 to 30 V Supplies Line regulation 5V CV cc Load regulation 5V CV CC The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 0 to 40 C 32 to
242. or from the multimeter DC Volts Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC volts measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the DC Volts Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter DC Millivolts Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC millivolt measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to mV Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V O4 and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the DC Millivolt Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 DMM91X Series Performance Verification 12 AC DC Volts Check Frequency Check Duty Factor Check DMM914 and DMM916 4 Set the calibrator output to OFF 5 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to verify the AC DC voltage measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to AC DC 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors 3 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the AC DC Volts Test record and verify that
243. oscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures HORIZONTAL SEC DIV ms SWEEP UNCAL Out 2 Connect the time mark generator to the CH 1 input with a 50 2 coaxial cable and 50 Q termination 3 Setup the generator to produce a 1 ms output 4 Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform two divisions in amplitude on the display 5 Adjust VR405 for a one marker per division display over the center eight divisions See Figure 8 for the adjustment location 1 ps and 1 ps Timing Use the following procedure to adjust the 1 us and 1 us timing 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CH1 CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 us HORIZONTAL SWP UNCAL Out 2 Connect the time mark generator to the CH 1 input with a 50 coaxial cable and 50 Q termination 3 Setup the generator to produce a 1 us output 4 Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform one division in amplitude on the display 5 Adjust VR404 for a one marker per division display See Figure 8 for the adjustment location 6 Set the generator to produce a 1 us output 7 Set the HORIZONTAL SEC DIV control to 1 us 8 Adjust VR802 for a one marker per division display See Figure 8 for the adjustment location X Gain Accuracy Use the following procedure to adjust the X gain accuracy 1 Set up the oscillos
244. ou will find the following information m A list of adjustments Wm A list of test equipment needed to make the adjustments m Instructions on how to prepare the instrument for adjustment m Step by step adjustment procedures The procedures in this section do not verify performance To confirm that your multimeter meets factory specifications perform the procedures in the Perfor mance Verification section Use the adjustments listed in Table 9 to return DMM91X Series multimeters to factory calibration Table 9 DMM91X Series Adjustments Adjustments Part 1 DC Volts AC Volts Capacitance Temperature DMM914 and DMM916 DC Milliamperes DC Amperes Adjustments Part 2 AC Response Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures Test Equipment The test equipment listed in Table 8 on page 9 is a complete list of equipment needed for the adjustment procedures These procedures assume that the test equipment is operating within tolerance Preparation for Adjustment The following guidelines apply to all DMM91X Series adjustments Open the Meter Case Perform all adjustments in a 21 to 25 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of 75 or less Warm up the multimeter for at least 15 minutes Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting Read
245. ough 9 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Keep the power supply set to OUT 2 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 3 Set the DMM to measure 5 amperes DC 4 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 3 1A OVP SET 38 5 V 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 6 Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 3 000 A 7 Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 volts over the adjustment range Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off then disable the electronic load Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT OUT 3 verify t
246. owing steps Disengage both TRACKING mode switches both switches out so the power supply is in the INDEPendent operating mode Set the MASTER AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to AMPS Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of 2 A Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the MASTER output Set the MASTER CURRENT control to maximum fully clockwise Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Adjustment Procedures 10 11 12 13 Adjust VR103 Master Slave circuit board for a reading of 1 05 A PS283 or 2 1 A PS280 on the multimeter Adjust VR202 Display Assembly circuit board until the PS280 PS283 front panel display reads 1 05 A PS283 or 2 1 A PS280 Disengage both TRACKING mode switches both switches out so that the power supply is in the INDEPendent operating mode Set the SLAVE AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to AMPS Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of 2 A Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the SLAVE output Set the SLAVE CURRENT control to maximum fully clockwise Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply Series Tracking Mode Adjustments Refer to Figures 6 7 and 9 for the circuit board and adjustment locations used in this procedure SERIES Tracking To adjust the series tracking mode perform the following steps 1 pv AAN Engage the left TRACKING mode switch sw
247. play Set the DC voltage source output to 450 000 mV 0 01 Reconnect the DC voltage source to the T1 probe connector Adjust VR3 until the display shows 000 0 The first digit of the tempera ture appears at the upper right hand corner of the display Disconnect the DC voltage source Remove the JP1 jumper Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DTM900 and DTM920 Adjustment Procedures 0 C Calibration Use the following procedure to perform a 0 calibration 1 Connect the thermocouple simulator to the T1 probe connector Set the thermocouple simulator and thermometer probe types to K Set the thermocouple simulator to 0 C Adjust VR1 until displayed temperature is between 00 1 and 00 1 Ue des cos ip Disconnect the thermocouple simulator JP1 EE 2 00 2 Front VR3 al VR2 Figure 3 DTM920 Thermometer Disassembly Test Points and Adjustment Locations 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix PS280 and PS283 Power Supplies 070 9894 00 AA ni Table of Contents PS280 and PS283 Power Supplies eee 1 Specifications ei a te Sin BG Rego nih lore SS 2 Performance Verification 0 eee 5 Test Equipment decies pec tb ase acd VAR as ae Ute Sema 6 Constant Current Load Regulation C
248. priate coils as necessary to multiply the AC Current calibrator output to each of the test values given in Table 7 on page 9 For more information refer to the user manual of your calibrator 3 Position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed 4 Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits and record the reading 5 Disconnect the calibrator 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Performance Verification DC Current Check To check the DC current accuracy perform the following steps 1 2 Set the meter function to DC In the absence of any magnetic fields press the DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the meter Select the appropriate coil s as necessary to multiply the DC Current calibrator output to each of the test values given in Table 8 on page 10 For more information refer to the user manual of your calibrator Position the clamp around the current loop of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits and record the reading Before each measurement set the calibrator output to off and press the DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the meter NOTE Any time a measurement appears to be out of tolerance turn the calibrator output off rezero the meter and t
249. procedure first m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual NOTE Altering the 12 V ADJ setting may require a complete readjustment of the instrument Remove the You must remove the instrument cover to make internal adjustments Instrument Cover WARNING To avoid electrical shock always disconnect the power cord from its source before removing the instrument cover After the adjustment procedures replace the instrument cover before using the oscilloscope To remove the cover refer to Figure 12 while performing the following steps 1 Remove the two cover screws on the instrument bottom 2 Remove the four rear panel mounting screws 3 Remove the rear panel 4 Slide the cover off the rear of the instrument To reinstall the cover perform steps 1 through 4 above in reverse order Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 23 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures r Rear panel mounting gt Screws 4 gt Rear panel Cover screws 2 LA Pd pa a r Instrument Ld Cover Figure 6 TAS 220 and TAS 250 Instrument Cover Removal 24 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Initial Settings Following the warm up period preset the oscilloscope to the settings listed below Table 20 Oscilloscope Initial Settings Control Setting INTENSITY Visible display CURS
250. put is disabled Connect the oscilloscope and 2 2 Q 50 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals See Figure 4 for details Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5 1A OVP SET 7N Repeat steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Remove the Variac from the test setup and repower the instrument Allow 20 minutes for the power supply to warm up and stabilize before the next check Complete the following procedures to verify constant current load and overcur rent protection accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 5 for details igi j Electronic load Digital multimeter P ower supply Figure 10 Constant Current Load Test Setup 3 4 Set the DMM to measure 5 amperes DC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20 V CURRENT SET 2 5 A OVP SET 22 V Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the
251. quipment and EC1010 2 032 particular requirements for hand held current clamps for electrical measurement and test Certifications Overvoltage Category Category Examples of Products in this Category CAT Ill Distribution level mains fixed installation CAT II Local level mains appliances portable equipment CAT I Signal levels in special equipment or parts of equipment telecommunications electronics Pollution Degree 2 Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be present Table 4 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Temperature Operating 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 7596 relative humidity Nonoperating 20 C to 460 C 21 to 140 F 8096 relative humidity Temperature Coefficient 0 2 x specified accuracy per C at 18 C or 228 C Maximum Altitude Operating 2 000 m 6 562 ft 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter performs as warranted If an instrument fails any of the checks 1t needs adjustment and or repair The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C 64 to 82 F ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 75 m The
252. r Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Description AC Voltage Auto Ranging nominal Input Impedance 10 MO 100 pF Ranges 600 V and 400 V Voltage Rating 600 Vg us CAT II Resolution 400 V Range 0 1V 600 V Range 1V Accuracy 40 to 500 Hz 1 2 of reading 5 digits Crest Factor DCM 320 only 1 4 to 2 0 add 0 696 to accuracy 2 0 to 2 5 add 2 096 to accuracy AC Current Auto Ranging Ranges 600A and 400A Overload Protection 800A Uninsulated Wire Voltage Rating 600 Vnus CAT II Resolution 400 A Range 0 1A 600 A Range 1A Accuracy 50 to 60 Hz 400 A Range 1 9 of reading 5 digits 600 A Range 2 9 of reading 5 digits Crest Factor DCM 320 only 1 4 to 2 0 add 1 096 to accuracy 2 0 to 2 5 add 2 596 to accuracy 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Specifications Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Resistance Auto ranging meter beeps if resistance is 100 Q Ranges 4 KQ and 40 KQ Overload P rotection 600 Vg us Resolution 4 kO Range 10 40kQ Range 100 Accuracy 2 0 of reading 9 digits Maximum Open Circuit Voltage 1V Table 2 General Specifications Characteristic Description Auto Power Off Approximately 30 minutes Battery 9 V NEDA1604 IEC6F 22 JIS 006P Battery Life 200 hours alkaline Maximum Conductor Size 40 mm Table 3 Certifications and Compliances Canadian Standards Assoc
253. r Perform the following steps to verify the DC ampere measurement accuracy 1 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 2 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM input connectors 3 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the DC Ampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMM91X Series Performance Verification 4 5 Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter AC Ampere Check Perform the following steps to verify the AC ampere measurement accuracy 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to A 5 Push the BLUE button to select AC mode Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter A and COM input connectors Set the calibrator to each of the values in the AC Ampere Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits Set the calibrator output to OFF Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 DMM91X Series Performance Verification DMM912 Test Records Serial Number Procedure performed by Date DMM912 Test Record AC Volts Test 3 6000 V 60 Hz 1 0 40 counts 3 5600 V 3 6400 V 1kHz 2 5 40 counts 3 5060 V 3 6940 V 36 000 V 1 0 40 counts 35 600 V 36 400 V 2 5 40 counts 35 060 V 36 940 V 360 00 V 60 Hz 1 0 4
254. r test leads to the calibrator outputs m Connect the calibrator common lead to the multimeter COM input W Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key m Connect the remaining calibrator output lead to the multimeter CV O4 input m Set the calibrator output to ON 4 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Capacitance Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Set the calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Temperature Check Perform the following steps to verify the temperature measurement accuracy DMM914 and DMM916 Set the multimeter dial to C F 2 Connect the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter to the multimeter C V O4 and COM input connectors 3 Connect the Standard thermocouple K type of the calibrator to the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter 4 Allow five minutes for the connector temperature to stabilize 5 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Temperature Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 6 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Volts Peak Hold Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC volts peak measurement accuracy DMM916 1 Set the multimeter dial to V 2 Push the GOLD button and then the M M A button to select PEAK H 3 Connect the calibrator
255. r the following procedures refer to Figures 8 and 10 The Main board occupies the bottom right side of the instrument Use the following procedure to adjust the X10 MAG registration 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms Rotate the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to move the left edge of the trace to the display center center vertical graticule line Set the HORIZONTAL X10 MAG push switch to the in position Verify that the trace is located within 1 division of the display vertical center If the trace does not line up use the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to reposition the trace to the display center Set the HORIZONTAL X10 MAG push switch to the out position Adjust VR502 to position the trace edge to the display vertical center See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the trace edge remains within 1 division of the display center when pressing the HORIZONTAL X10 MAG push switch in and out Use the following procedure to adjust the horizontal position 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION Midrange HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms Center the HORIZONTAL POSITION control Adjust VR408 to align the left edge of the trace to the left most graticule of the display See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Use the following procedure to adjust the 1 ms timing 1 Set up the oscill
256. racy Complete the following procedures to verify current setting and readout accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 9 10 11 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 10 V CURRENT SET 1 5A OVP SET 11V Press STEP SET Set the CURRENT SET to 0 002 A Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 2 amperes DC across the front panel OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 1 487 and 1 513 A Press CURRENT A or CURRENT V to adjust the power supply output current until the DMM reads 1 500 A Verify that the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates between 1 487 and 1 513 A Press CURRENT SET Set the power supply output current to 0 1 A Verify that the DMM reads between 0 089 and 0 111 A Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 16 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 13 Repeat steps 2 through 11 above to measure the OUTPUT 2 current setting and readout accuracy Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 9 Press SHIFT
257. raticule line of the oscilloscope display 11 Verify that the time mark to graticule accuracy over the center eight divisions is within the limits shown for each HORIZONTAL SEC DIV setting listed in Table 16 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Trigger Check 16 Table 16 X10 MAG Time Base Accuracy HORIZONTAL Time Marker Time Mark to Graticule Over SEC DIV Setting Center 8 Divisions 10 ns 10 ns 0 64 division 20ns 20ns 0 64 division 50 ns 50 ns 0 64 division 12 Set the oscilloscope HORIZONTAL X10 MAG push switch to the off position out The following check verifies the trigger accuracy of your oscilloscope 1 Use the 50 Q precision coaxial cable to connect the output of the leveled sine wave generator to the 50 Q termination then connect the 50 Q termination to the TAS 200 series instrument CH 1 input See Figure 5 below Sine Wave Generator Precision Cable 50 Q Termination Figure 5 Trigger Level Check Setup 2 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 VOLTS DIV 1V CH 1 AC DC DC CH 1 GND Out release HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 5 us TRIGGER MODE AUTO TRIGGER LEVEL Midway Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification TRIGGER COUPLING DC TRIGGER SET TO 5090 Out release 3 Setthe leveled sine wave generator to produce a five di
258. rator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude on the display 3 Adjust VC102 VC202 to obtain an optimum waveform symmetry with minimal overshoot See Figure 10 for the adjustment locations Qa 1 10 1 10 Instrument ave 101 VC201 TRIG BAL front Qvc102 Ove22 amp VR403 TRIG CENT 1 100 1 100 O VR407 Q e VC104 VC204 X AXIS DC OFFSET VR401 STEP BAT STEP BAT VR101 VR201 Figure 10 Main Board Viewed from the Instrument Bottom 4 Set the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control to 1 V 5 Readjust the generator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude Adjust VC 104 VC204 to obtain an optimum waveform symmetry with minimal overshoot See Figure 10 for the adjustment locations 6 Disconnect the square wave generator from the instrument 7 Connect a 10X probe to the CH1 CH 2 input 8 Set the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control to 10 mV division Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Connect the probe to the square wave generator and confirm that the output is a 1 kHz square wave Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude on the display Adjust the probe compensation to flatten and optimize the waveform Set the CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV control to 0 1 V Readjust the generator output to produce a waveform five divisions in amplitude
259. rease the current below 0 000 A Err 019 appears on the readouts and the C C indicator lights The current should decrease in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout Press CURRENT ZA and verify that as you attempt to increase the current past 1 550 A Err 017 appears on the readouts The current should increase in 1 ampere steps on the CURRENT A readout To check the function of OUTPUT 2 press SHIFT gt OUT 2 Verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display then repeat steps 2 through 18 above To check the function of OUTPUT 3 press SHIFT gt OUT 3 Verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display then continue with the steps below 19 10 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 5V CURRENT SET 2A OVP SET 7N DELAY 3s Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Press SHIFT gt STORE gt 1 to store the above values in the memory 01 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values listed in step 19 for memory location 01 Reset the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3A DELAY 3s Press SHIFT gt STORE gt 2 to store the above values in the memory 02 location Verify that the MEMORY CURRENT A and VOLTS readouts display the values set in step 21 for memory location 02 Repeat steps 6 through 12 abov
260. rification Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Keep the power supply set to OUT 2 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Set the DMM to measure 5 amperes DC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V CURRENT SET 3 0A OVP SET 38 5 V Repeat steps 5 through 14 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above but verify that the difference between I1 and I2 is lt 0 006 A Repeat steps 15 through 18 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 5 Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 3 0A OVP SET 7N Repeat steps 5 through 18 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Constant Current Complete the following procedures to verify constant current source accuracy Source Accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use t
261. rifies the PARALLEL mode MASTER current regulation performance 1 Setthe power supply to the PARALLEL operating mode by engaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches in 2 Setup the digital multimeter to measure 25 VDC 3 Connect the digital multimeter to the and terminals of the power supply MASTER output 4 Adjust the power supply MASTER VOLTAGE control until the digital multimeter reads 25 VDC 5 Disconnect the digital multimeter from the power supply Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification 6 Set the digital multimeter to measure a DC current of at least 1 A PS280 or 0 5 A PS283 Connect the digital multimeter and load resistors to the and terminals of the power supply MASTER output as shown in Figure 2 See Table 7 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that the power supply output current varies less than 0 2 5 mA while shunting load resistor RL1 with the shorting strap See Figure 2 above Constant Current Ripple and Noise Check To check the constant current ripple and noise performance of your power supply perform the following tests Power supply Test oscilloscope Figure 3 Constant Current Ripple and Noise Test Setup MASTER Current Ripple The following check verifies the MASTER current ripple 1 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Set the power suppl
262. rizontal Position 1 ms Timing 1 us and 1 us Timing X Gain Accuracy X Axis Offset Trigger Adjustments Trigger DC Offset Trigger Slope Balance Trigger Center Probe Compensation Cursors and Readout Adjustments Cursor Accuracy Drift Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 21 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Test Equipment To ensure accurate adjustments use the following or equivalent test equipment If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 19 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the adjustment procedures NOTE Before making any adjustment warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 19 Adjustment Test Equipment Description Leveled Sine Wave Generator Time Mark Generator DC Calibration Generator Digital Multimeter Termination two required Cable Coaxial Cable Precision Coaxial Coupler Probe 22 Minimum Requirements 1 kHz to 250 MHz variable amplitude from 5 mV to 4 Vp p into 50 Q Variable marker frequency from 1 ms to 10 ns accuracy within 2 ppm DC voltage levels from 100 mV to 10 V 35 V 4A 0 196 Accuracy 50 O female BNC input male BNC output 75 Q male to male BNC connectors 36 inch length 50 Q male to male BNC connecto
263. ror to less than 1 total while positioning the coil in the clamp Remove the clamp meter from the coil DC Auto Zero To adjust the DC zero calibration perform the following steps 1 Setthe clamp meter to the DC position 2 Short the Auto Zero points indicated in Figure 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DCM910 Adjustment Procedures 14 DC 400 A Range DC 1000 A Range AC 400 A Range 2x woe Le Adjust VR2 until the display reads 00 0 5 counts Remove the short Press the clamp meter DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the display Adjust VR3 until the display reads 00 0 To adjust the DC 400 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the DC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of DC current calibrator to 200 A Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR5 until the display reads 201 5 Remove the clamp meter from the coil To adjust the DC 1000 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 A 5m oR Set the clamp meter to the DC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the DC current calibrator to 400 A Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely clos
264. rrent 1 2 3 Press SHIFT OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Press SHIFT CURRENT Y Enter the calibration password on the keypad PS2520 amp PS2520G enter 2520 PS2521 amp PS2521G enter 2521 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL00 indicating calibration mode Configure the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC Enter 4 on the power supply keypad Press VOLTS ZA to select the parallel output full scale current calibration verify that the the readout displays cL41 indicating parallel output full scale calibration Press lt on the power supply Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 61 PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures 9 Enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad and press lt The power supply readout will return to normal in approximately 5 seconds The calibration is complete Output 3 Use the following steps to calibrate OUTPUT 3 1 2 3 Press SHIFT OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Press SHIFT CURRENT Y Enter the calibration password on the keypad PS2520 amp PS2520G enter 2520 PS2521 amp PS2521G enter 2521 Verify that the power supply readout displays cL00 indicating calibration mode Configure the DMM to measure DC volts autorange Connect the DMM positive and negative leads to the correspo
265. rs 36 inch length Female BNC to dual male BNC dual input Standard accessory probe Example Product Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibration System with Oscilloscope Calibration Module Option 250 Fluke 5500A Multi product Calibrator with Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500A SC Tektronix DMM252 Digital Multimeter Tektronix 011 0049 01 Tektronix 012 1338 00 Tektronix 012 0482 00 Tektronix 067 0525 02 Tektronix P 6109B Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Preparation for Adjustment Perform the adjustment procedures on an as needed basis If an oscilloscope section fails a performance requirement or if a section is replaced or repaired adjust only that section Adjusting individual sections of the oscilloscope rarely affects its overall performance In general accurate adjustments require a stable well focused low intensity display Unless otherwise noted adjust the INTENSITY FOCUS and TRIG GER LEVEL controls as needed to view the display In addition to the above the following guidelines apply to all instrument adjustments m Perform the adjustments in a 20 to 30 C 68 to 86 F ambient environ ment m Before making any adjustments warm up the instrument for at least 20 minutes W Do not alter a setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment
266. ry again 7 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Disconnect the calibrator DCM910 Performance Verification Frequency Check To check the frequency accuracy perform the following steps 1 2 Set the meter function to Hz Select the appropriate coil as necessary to multiply the AC Current calibrator output to 20 A Position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits for each of the frequencies listed in Table 9 on page 10 and record the reading Disconnect the calibrator Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Performance Verification Test Records Serial Number Procedure performed by Date Table 7 AC Current Checks AC Current Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit 0 0A 00 8 10 0A 11 0 11 0 100 0 A 102 7 102 7 300 0 A 306 5 306 5 400A 417 417 600 A 622 622 1000 A 1034 1034 1 At these frequencies the inductance of the DCM910 may shut down the output of some calibrators If this happens decrease the calibrator output frequency until the output remains on for the duration of the test Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Performance Verification Table 8 DC Current Checks m 010 100 0 A 1049
267. s Calibration Type Display Code Connection Instructions Voltage cL10 cL11 Connect DMM positive and negative leads to the corresponding power supply and OUTPUT terminals Current cL20 cL21 Connect DMM positive and negative leads to the corresponding power supply and OUTPUT terminals Overvoltage Protection cL30 cL31 No connection from DMM to power supply Parallel Output Current cL40 cL41 Connect DMM positive and negative leads to the corresponding power supply 4 and OUTPUT terminals NOTE The DMM range and function must be properly selected before proceed ing to the next step Ensure that good connections exist between the DMM and the power supply 7 Enter the calibration mode on the keypad a b c d Press 1 for voltage calibrations Press 2 for current calibrations Press 3 for overvoltage protection calibrations Press 4 for parallel output calibrations 8 Press VOLTS A for offset calibration or press VOLTS Y for full scale calibration Verify that the readout displays the correct code for the desired calibration See Table 10 10 Press lt on the power supply keypad to initiate the calibration Refer to the instructions below to complete each calibration Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures cL10 Voltage Offset Calibration To calibrate the voltage offset enter the DMM reading on the power supply keypad
268. s Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 Repeat steps 5 through 9 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 3 Set the DMM to measure 10 amperes DC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 5 1A OVP SET 22 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the DMM current reads 5 000 A Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout changes lt 0 003 volts over the adjustment range Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 47 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 48 Constant Voltage Ripple and Noise Accuracy Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off then disable the electronic load Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the
269. s shown in Figure 6 11 Repeat steps 5 to 8 above Parallel Operation Use the following steps to check the parallel mode output accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 53 PS2520 Series Performance Verification Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicators light up on the display Set the DMM to measure 5 amperes DC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 20V CURRENT SET 5 0A OVP SET 22 V Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Adjust the output of the Variac from 108 to 132 VAC 120 V range or 198 to 242 VAC 220 V range Verify that the DMM current variation is lt 0 006 A over the adjustment range Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and 2 2 Q 50 W resistor to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals See Figure 6 for details Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5 0A OVP SET 7N
270. s any of these checks it needs adjustment and or repair The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The multimeter operates in an 18 to 28 C 64 to 82 F ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 75 m The multimeter stabilizes in the stated ambient temperature for one hour m The multimeter warms up for five minutes W For AC measurements allow the multimeter to settle to its final value before taking the measurement m The multimeter remains fully assembled and in the holster The DMM800 Series performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 7 Table 7 Performance Verification Checks AC Volts Check DC Volts Check DC Millivolts Check AC DC Volts Check Frequency Check Duty Factor Check DMM850 and DMM870 Q Check Low Voltage O Check Continuity Check Diode Check Capacitance Check Temperature Check DMM850 and DMM870 Volts Peak Hold Check DMM870 DC Milliampere Check AC Milliampere Check DC Ampere Check AC Ampere Check Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirem
271. s each Table 6 Certifications and Compliance Characteristic Description Meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 ECC for Product Safety Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official J ournal of the European Communities EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted E missions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 801 3 RF Radiated EN 61010 1 Electrical equipment safety requirements for measurement control and laboratory use Certified UL3111 1 and CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 EC Declaration of Conformity Certifications 6 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS800 Series Specifications Table 6 Certifications and Compliance Cont Description CAT III Distribution level mains fixed installation CAT Il Local level mains appliances portable equipment CAT I Signal level special equipment or parts of equipment telecommunication electronics Do not operate in environments where conductive pollutants may be present Characteristic Overvoltage category Pollution Degree 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DMMS00 Series Performance Verification Performance Verification This section contains procedures to verify that the DMM830 DMMS50 and DMMS70 Digital Multimeters perform as warranted If an instrument fail
272. s section contains procedures to verify that the DTM900 and DTM920 thermometers perform as warranted If an instrument fails any of the checks it needs adjustment and or repair Verify the performance of your thermometer annually or whenever its accuracy or function is in question The performance verification procedures provide a valid confirmation of instrument electrical characteristics and function under the following conditions m The instrument operates in an 18 to 28 C ambient environment with a relative humidity of less than 80 m The instrument warms up for 60 minutes m The instrument remains fully assembled do not remove the bottom cover The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 4 Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 4 Performance Verification Test Equipment Description Example Product Thermocouple Simulator 200 to1370 C 0 01 Wavetek 9100 Universal 328 to 2498 F 0 01 Calibration System or Fluke 5500A Calibrator
273. se noted m The instrument warms up for 60 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Specifications marked with the symbol are checked in the performance verification procedures Table 1 General Characteristics Characteristic Description Product Measurement Range DTM900 50 to 1300 C 58 to 1999 F DTM920 K type probe 200 to 1370 C 328 to 2498 F DTM920 J type probe 200 to 760 C 328 to 1400 F Accuracy Resolution of Reading DTM900 0 19 C 0 2 12 C 580 3919 F OF 0 2 2 F Ir 8035 4 F 200 togeggec wc 50486 2 C TSF 392 to 1831 F 0 4 4 F 1000 to 1300 C ISC 0 6 2 C 1832 to 1999 F TSE 0 6 4 F JH e op o 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DTM900 and DTM920 Specifications Table 1 General Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Accuracy Temperature Range Resolution of Reading DTM 920 K type probe 200 to 100 C 0 19 C 0 3 1 C 328 to 148 F 0 2 F 0 3 2 F 99 9 to 999 9 C 0 19 C 0 1 0 7 C 147 9 to 999 9 F 0 22 F 0 1 1 4 F 1000 to 1370 C 1 C 0 3 41 C 1000 to 2498 F 2 F 0 3 2 F T1 T2 reading 0 3 42 2 C Accuracy Temperature Range Resolution of Reading D
274. sg eue aue S 12 Oscilloscope Verification ooooooooorororrr n 15 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service i Table of Contents ii Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Ege Cac THM500 Series Instruments The Tektronix THM500 Series instruments combine the features of a complete digital multimeter DMM with the power of an oscilloscope all in a single package The DMM portion of these instruments measure true RMS AC and DC voltage resistance continuity with audible mode and a diode test The DMM portion also includes the following features m A hold feature to freeze the display m MIN and MAX readouts to track instantaneous signal variations from the last held value A Hold m AC and DC current measurement with optional current probe The oscilloscope portion of the instruments feature an autoranging mode that completely automates operation In this mode a usable signal is always displayed without operator intervention If desired you can switch to manual mode by selecting any control In manual mode you can specify general oscilloscope operations such as coupling triggering and acquisition modes THM550 THM560 and THM565 models include preconfigured modes to set up the oscilloscope for motor testing transformer THDF measurement power line monitoring and power measurement The THM57x series instruments include preconfigured automotive test setups True RMS Multi
275. sing the Wavetek 9100 set the amplitude to 1 V Select the square wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 1 000 V Selectthe sine wave AC mode if using the Fluke 5500A set the amplitude to 0 354 V Q Test 0 00 Q1 30 596 10 counts 0 100 0100 360 00 Q1 1 10 counts 356 300 363 70 Q 3 6000 kO 0 5 10 counts 3 5810 3 6190 kO 36 000 kO 0 5 10 counts 35 810 36 190 kO 360 00 kO 0 5 10 counts 358 10 kO 361 90 kO 3 6000 MQ 1 10 counts 3 5630 MQ 3 6370 MQ 20 00 MO 5 10 counts 18 90 MQ 21 10 MQ 1 To test these values with the Fluke 5500A apply 0 0 Q and set the DMM to Delta mode 2 4000 count mode only Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 19 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification DMM630 Test Record Cont Test Input Display Minimum Display Maximum Low Voltage Q Test 3 600 kQ 1 1 count 3 563 kQ 3 637 kQ 36 00 kO 1 1 count 35 63 kO 36 37 KQ 360 0 kO 1 1 count 356 3 KQ 363 7 kQ 3 600 MO 1 1 count 3 563 MQ 3 637 MQ 1 4000 count mode only Use DMM manual ranging or set calibrator to 3 0 kQ before selecting 3 6kQ Continuity Test 0 0 0 Beeper sounds 150 Q Beeper does notsound Diode Test 0 5 V 0 400 V 0 600 V Capacitance Test 2 3 600 nF 1 10 counts 3 554 nF 3 646 nF 36 00 nF 5196 10 counts 35 54 nF 36 46 nF 360 0 nF 1 10 counts 355 4 nF 364 6 nF 3 600 uF 1 10 counts 3 554 uF 3 64
276. stalled on the instrument The PS280 and PS283 performance verification consists of the checks listed in Table 5 Table 5 Performance Verification Checks Constant Current Load Regulation Check MASTER CurrentRegulation INDEP mode SLAVE Current Regulation INDEP mode MASTER Current Regulation PARALLEL mode Constant Current Ripple and Noise Check MASTER Current Ripple SLAVE Current Ripple Constant Voltage Regulation Check MASTER Voltage Regulation SLAVE Voltage Regulation 5 V Fixed Voltage Regulation Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification Test Equipment The performance verification procedures use external traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics If you substitute equipment always choose instruments that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 6 Alternate test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum require ments If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations Table 6 Performance Verification and Adjustment Test Equipment Description Oscilloscope Digital Multimeter Fixed Resistive Loads Variable Resistive Load Shorting Strap with Alligator Clips Minimum Requirements 50
277. supply readouts display the error message Err 065 3 Press OVP SET again set the OVP to 7 V Verify that power supply readouts display no error message 4 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 4V CURRENT SET LA OVP SET 5V 5 Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 02 V 6 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 7 Press VOLTS ZA to increase the power supply output voltage until the error message Err 013 appears on the readouts Verify that the readouts indicate between 4 3 and 5 7 V prior to error message activation 8 Press SHIFT gt OVP RESET 9 Reset the output voltage to 4 V 10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 above as necessary to determine the exact voltage 11 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Constant Voltage Complete the following procedures to verify constant voltage load accuracy Load Accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display 2 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 1 terminals See Figure 2 for details ER Power suppl Electronic load Digital multimeter pey F
278. t m Set the calibrator output to ON 4 Set the calibrator to each of the values in the Capacitance Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 5 Set the calibrator output to OFF 6 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Temperature Check Perform the following steps to verify the temperature measurement accuracy DMM850 and DMM870 Set the multimeter dial to C F 2 Connect the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter to the multimeter C V O4 and COM input connectors 3 Connect the Standard thermocouple K type of the calibrator to the ATKO1 thermocouple adapter 4 Allow five minutes for the connector temperature to stabilize 5 Setthe calibrator to each of the values in the Temperature Test record and verify that the multimeter reads within the specified Display Minimum and Maximum limits 6 Setthe calibrator output to OFF 7 Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Volts Peak Hold Check Perform the following steps to verify the DC volts peak measurement accuracy DMM870 1 Set the multimeter dial to V 2 Push the GOLD button and then the M M A button to select PEAK H 3 Connect the calibrator outputs to the multimeter C V Q46 and COM input connectors Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 15 DMMS00 Series Performance Verification 16 DC Milliampere Check AC Milliampere Check DC Ampere Check 4 Sett
279. t use the screwdriver to adjust VR4 until the buzzer sounds again Remove the cover to adjust replace the cover to test 6 When you complete all adjustments turn the multimeter off and replace the bottom cover Do not pinch the battery leads between the case halves during reassembly Moo VR3 VR4 4 ag E O ES O VR1 Figure 2 Adjustment Locations Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 14 DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustment Procedures Table 11 Summary of Adjustments Adjustment Circuit Name Test Value Range Setting Location Tolerance Display Min Display Max AC Volts 300 0 V 500 Hz DCM300 300 3 50 Hz DCM320 Ohm 1 000 KQ 1 001 kO 150 Q Adjust VR 4 until the buzzer just sounds Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Instructions Manual Tektronix DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter 070 9848 00 AA ni Table of Contents DCM330 Digital Clamp Meter eee 1 Specifications io a niet Ace eels aw lbs E 2 Performance Verification eee 5 Test Bquipmient Li dre cen D og von as CR ea Soc iOS 5 Set Ups oi sd eese n P CE OE UNE REGE Ri MERO eee 6 Verification Procedure ess aeeie a n 6 Test Records sS ssi ed A A UR eR bg Es 9 Adjustment Procedures ooooooooooooocmorsorososcoso 11 List of Adjustments seee sene e e e e e n 11 Test Equipment ie orp a E RR rr e err E cis 11 Preparation for Adjustment
280. t least ten minutes A thirty minute warm up period is required if the instrument has been exposed to a high hu midity or high condensing environment Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Adjustment Procedures m Perform the adjustments in a 22 to 24 C 71 to 75 F ambient environ ment with a relative humidity of 75 or less m Do not alter any setting unless a performance characteristic cannot be met at the current setting m Do not alter any setting without reading the entire adjustment procedure first m Read the Safety Summary at the beginning of this manual before proceeding Remove Instrument Cover You must remove the instrument cover to make internal adjustments WARNING To avoid electrical shock disconnect the power cord from its source while removing the instrument cover Following the adjustment procedure replace the instrument cover before using the power supply To remove the instrument cover refer to Figure 12 while performing the following steps 1 Remove the two handle mounting screws with a Phillips head screwdriver 2 Remove the six side panel mounting screws 3 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument and lift To reinstall the cover perform steps 1 through 3 above in reverse order mounting r Handle screws 2 pls w Side panel mounting screws 6 Figure 12 PS2520 Series Instrument Cover Removal Handheld and Benchtop Instruments B
281. t steps 4 through 10 above Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals and connect them to the OUTPUT 2 terminals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configura tion and polarities shown in Figure 2 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Series Operation Use the following steps to check the series mode output accuracy 1 With the power supply set to OUT 2 press SHIFT gt SERIES INDEP to configure OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 for series operation Verify that the SERIES indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Perform steps 5 through 8 of the Outputs 1 and 2 procedure above Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification Verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 50 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 terminals and connect them to the OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 1 ter
282. t the calibrator from the multimeter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 35 DMM91X Series Adjustment Procedures 36 AC Volts Capacitance Perform the following steps to adjust the AC voltage calibration at 60 Hz 1 2 Set the multimeter dial to V Set the calibrator to output 2 0000 VAC at 60 Hz Connect the outputs of the calibrator to the C V O4 and COM input connectors of the multimeter Adjust VR6 until the display shows 1 9999 to 2 0001 VAC Turn the calibrator output off Disconnect the calibrator from the multimeter Perform the following steps to adjust the capacitance calibration 1 Set the multimeter dial to 4C 2 Null the residual DMM and lead capacitance offset a Using Fluke 5500A or Wavetek 9100 minus the 9105 front porch Set the calibrator output to OFF Connect the test leads to the multimeter C V Q4 and COM inputs Connect the multimeter COM lead to the calibrator common output Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A key Connect the multimeter C V Q4c lead to the remaining calibrator output Set the calibrator output to ON b Using Wavetek 9100 with 9105 front porch Set the calibrator output to OFF Connect the multimeter test leads to the calibrator outputs Connect the calibrator common lead to the multimeter COM input Press the multimeter gold key followed by the A 96 key Connect the remaining calibrator output lead to the mult
283. t unless otherwise noted NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Table 1 General Specifications Characteristic Description Display 334 digit 4000 count LCD Polarity Display Automatic Overrange Display OVER is displayed Low Voltage Indicator Battery indicator is displayed Measurement Rate 50 ms Automatic power off time Approximately 30 minutes Power Six AA UM 3 R6 dry cell batteries Battery Life Back light Off typically greater than 10 hours using six alkaline batteries Maximum Floating Voltage 600 VACrms CAT II or 850 VDC between any terminal to earth and ground Maximum Input Voltage 600 VACgus CAT II or 850 VDC between V and COM Maximum Input Current Between mA and COM 400 mA Between A and COM 10A for2 minutes 8A Maximum Open Circuit Input Voltage Between A and COM 600 V Between mA and COM 350 V 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Specifications Table 2 Measurement Characteristics Characteristic Description Volts DC Ranges 400 mV 4 V 40 V 400 V 850 V AC Ranges 400 mV 4 V 40 V 400 V 600 V DC Accuracy 0 3 of reading 2 counts AC Accuracy 40 to 50 Hz 1 5 of reading 5 counts 50 to 60 Hz 1 0 of reading 5 counts 60 Hz to 1 kHz 1 5 of reading 5 counts Input Impedance Maximum 1 MC
284. tage specified in the second column Verify that the THM500 series instrument readout is within the range listed in the third column Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM500 Series Performance Verification Table 7 DC Voltage Accuracy Test Limits Instrument Range DC Voltage Source Instrument Readout 400 mV 300 mV 298 0 to 302 0 4V 3V 2 980 to 3 020 40V 30V 29 80 to 30 20 400 V 300 V 298 0 to 302 0 850 V 500 V 492 to 508 AC Voltage Accuracy The following check verifies AC voltage accuracy to apply test signals to the THM500 series instrument do not touch the exposed conductors WARNING This test uses hazardous voltages If you use standard banana plugs 1 Set the THM500 series instrument to METER mode displaying V AC If the range display at the lower right corner does not indicate AUTO press the A and Y buttons simultaneously to set the RANGE to AUTO 2 Setthe voltage source to 60 Hz AC output 3 For each row of Table 8 use the A and Y buttons to set the THM500 series instrument to the range specified in the first column then set the voltage source to the output voltage specified in the second column Verify that the THM500 series instrument readout is within the range listed in the third column Table 8 AC Voltage Accuracy Test Limits Instrument Range Voltage Source at 60 Hz Instrument Readout 400 mV 300 mV 293 5 to 306 5 4V 3V 2 935 to 3 065 40V 30V 29 35 to 30 65 400 V
285. the AC voltage calibrator output to the multimeter V Q and COM input terminals Adjust VR1 with a small flat tipped screwdriver set the multimeter reading to 300 0 Disconnect the voltage calibrator To adjust the resistance calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set up the resistance calibrator to simulate a 1 KQ resistance load Set the multimeter function switch to the Q position Connect the resistance calibrator output to the multimeter V Q and COM input terminals Adjust VR3 with a small flat tipped screwdriver set the multimeter reading to 1 000 Disconnect the resistance calibrator To adjust the continuity calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set up the resistance calibrator to simulate a 150 Q resistance load Connect the resistance calibrator output to the multimeter V Q and COM input terminals Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM300 and DCM320 Adjustment Procedures 3 Place the bottom cover back on the meter and hold it in place The continuity buzzer will not sound during the following adjustments without the cover in place 4 Ifthe buzzer does not sound use a small flat tipped screwdriver to adjust VR4 until the buzzer sounds You will have to remove the bottom cover to make the adjustment and then replace the cover to make the test 5 Ifthe buzzer does sound use a small flat tipped screwdriver to adjust VR4 until the buzzer does not sound After tha
286. tion System with Oscilloscope Calibration Module Option 250 Fluke 5500A Multi product Calibrator with Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500A SC Tektronix DMM252 Digital Multimeter Tektronix 011 0049 01 Tektronix 012 1338 00 Tektronix 012 0482 00 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Set Up Following a 20 minute warm up period preset the oscilloscope to the settings listed below Table 12 Oscilloscope Initial Settings Control Setting INTENSITY Visible Display CURSOR ON OFF off VERTICAL POSITION Midrange MODE CH1 VOLTS DIV 10 mV VARIABLE CAL GND In HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 10 ms POSITION Midrange MAG Off Out X Y Off Out SWEEP VARIABLE CAL TRIGGER SLOPE Positive push switch out LEVEL Midrange MODE AUTO SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Vertical Check The following checks verify the vertical accuracy of your oscilloscope DC Gain Accuracy To check DC gain accuracy perform the following steps 1 Use the 50 Q precision coaxial cable to connect the standard amplitude output of the DC calibration generator to the TAS 200 series oscilloscope CH 1 CH 2 input See Figure 2 below Calibration generator Precision cable Figure 2 Gain and Voltage Check Setup 2 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV
287. to 122 F Storage 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Humidity Operating 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Up to 90 relative humidity noncondensing e 60 for 4 and 40 MQ measurements 41 to 50 C 106 to 122 F 6096 relative humidity noncondensing Altitude Operating 2 200 m 7 221 ft Storage 12 192 m 40 000 ft Random Vibration 5 to 500 Hz 10 min axis operating 2 66 gnus 5 to 500 Hz 10 min axis nonoperating 3 48 gams Sine Vibration Operating 0 06 inch displacement from 5 to 15 Hz e 0 04 inch displacement from 15 to 25 Hz 0 02 inch displacement from 25 to 55 Hz TestDuration 10 minutes atthe peak resonance condition 33 Hz if no resonance found Test performed on each of three axes Half sine Shock EMC Emissions Immunity Mechanical Size Weight Tripod Socket Safety Certifications Surge Protection Operating 30g with pulse duration of 11 ms Three shocks per axis Test Duration 10 minutes at the peak resonance condition 33 Hz if no resonance found Test performed on each of three axes EN 55011 radiated class A ONO IEC 801 2 electrostatic discharge Up to 8 kV e IEC 801 3 radiated immunity 3 V meter 27 to 500 MHz 140 mm 5 5 inch high x 210 mm 8 3 inch wide x 43 mm 1 7 inch deep ojojo 1 kg 2 2 lb with Alkaline batteries installed ojele 0 25 inch x 20 thread x 6 3 mm 0 25 inch deep oejolo Listed UL 3111 1 for 600 V CAT Il measurements CSA C22 2
288. top Instruments Basic Service DCM910 Specifications Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Accuracy OA to 20A 1 9 of reading 10 counts 20 1 A to 400A 1 9 of reading 40 counts 401 A to 1000 A 2 9 of reading 5 counts Frequency Auto Ranging Ranges 4 kHz and 10 kHz Sensitivity 6 Anus 10 Arms 1kHz to 10 kHz Resolution 4 kHz Range 1 Hz 10 kHz Range 10 Hz Accuracy 0 5 of reading 3 counts Peak Hold Range Low High Resolution Low 0 1A High 1 0A Accuracy 3 of reading 10 counts Table 2 General Specifications Characteristic Description Auto Power Off Approximately 30 minutes Battery 9 V NEDA1604 IECGF 22 JIS 006P Battery Life 40 hours alkaline Maximum Conductor Size 51 mm 2 inch diameter or 24 x 60 mm 95 x 2 36 inch bus bar Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 3 DCM910 Specifications Table 3 Certifications and Compliances Canadian Standards Association certified to Standard CSA 1010 1 Standard UL3111 1 for Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Testing Equipment and EC1010 2 032 particular requirements for hand held current clamps for electrical measurement and test Certifications Overvoltage Category Category Examples of Products in this Category CAT Ill Distribution level mains fixed installation CAT II Local level mains appliances portable equipment CAT I Signal levels in special equipment or
289. traceable test equipment to directly check warranted characteristics The following procedures use either the Wavetek 9100 Universal Calibration System with Oscilloscope Calibration Module Option 250 or the Fluke 5500A Multi product Calibrator with Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500A SC Alternative test equipment must meet or exceed the intended minimum requirements If you substitute equipment you may need to modify the performance verification procedures NOTE Before beginning the performance verification procedures warm up the test equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendations WARNING The following tests use hazardous voltages If you use standard banana plugs to apply test signals to the THM420 instrument do not touch the exposed conductors NOTE For the following series of tests set the METER SCOPE button to the METER mode To verify the performance of your THM420 instrument perform the following checks in sequential order The following check verifies DC voltage measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to V 5 2 Setthe DC AC button to DCV 3 Connect the voltage source output to the THM420 COM and the V O Hz inputs 4 Configure the voltage source to output DC 5 Set the controls of the THM420 and the voltage source to each of the values listed in Table 9 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits Handheld and Benchtop Instruments B
290. ts up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 19 965 and 20 035 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 20 00 VDC Verify that the power supply VOLTS readout indicates between 19 965 and 20 035 V Press VOLTS SET Set the power supply output voltage to 0 1 V Set the DMM to measure 1 VDC across the power supply OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Verify that the DMM reads between 0 0749 and 0 1250 VDC Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 35 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 36 13 Press SHIFT gt OUT 2 verify that the 2 indicator lights up on the display 14 Repeat steps 2 through 12 above to measure the OUTPUT 2 voltage setting and readout accuracy Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display 2 Setup the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V OVP SET 7N 3 Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V 4 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 10 VDC across the power supply front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals 5 Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display 6 Verify that the DMM reads between 5 972 and 6 028 VDC 7 Press VOLTS A or VOLTS Y to adjust the power supply output voltage until
291. ule line using the CH 1 and CH 2 VERTICAL POSITION controls 3 Setthe VERTICAL MODE control to the ADD position 4 On the Main board adjust VR301 to position the trace on the center horizontal graticule line See Figure 8 for the adjustment location 5 Set the VERTICAL MODE switch to BOTH CH2 and then CH1 verify that the trace shifts less than 1 division from the center of the display If necessary repeat steps 2 through 4 to obtain the best performance Vertical Gain Use the following procedure to adjust the vertical gain 1 Setup the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 10 mV CH 1 CH 2 VARIABLE CAL CH 1 CH 2 AC DC DC 2 Connect a 50 mVy 50 kHz square wave to the CH 1 and CH 2 inputs with a dual input coupler 3 On the Main board adjust VR108 to obtain a waveform five divisions in amplitude See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 31 TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures 32 MAG Sensitivity High Frequency Compensation Dc WU Set the CH 2 VERTICAL INVERT push switch to the in position Set the VERTICAL MODE control to the ADD position Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule Adjust VR208 to obtain a flat line See Figure 8 for the adjustment location Use the following procedure to adjust the MAG Sensitivity 1 Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 CH 1 CH 2 VOLTS DIV 2m
292. upply outputs for parallel operation Verify that the PARA indicator lights up on the display Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 11 PS2520 Series Performance Verification 12 Voltage Set Accuracy 5 Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP again to reconfigure the outputs for indepen dent operation Verify that the PARA and SERIES indicators turn off Set GPIB Use the following steps to check the GPIB address 1 2 3 Press LOCAL Enter a GPIB address 0 to 30 and press Press SHIFT gt ADDRESS Verify that the address entered in step 2 above appears on the readout for about one second Complete the following procedures to verify voltage setting and readout accuracy Outputs 1 and 2 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 accuracy 1 2 9 10 11 12 Press SHIFT gt OUT 1 verify that the 1 indicator lights up on the display Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 36V OVP SET 37V Press STEP SET Set the VOLTS SET to 0 05 V Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Configure the DMM to measure 40 VDC across the front panel OUTPUT 1 2 terminals Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Verify that the DMM reads between 35 950 and 36 050 VDC Press VOLTS A or VOLTS V to adjust the power supply output voltage until the DMM reads 36 00 VDC Verify that the power supply VOLTS re
293. urce to each of the values listed in Table 11 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits Table 11 Ohms Accuracy Readout Limits THM420 Range Resistance Source Minimum Maximum 400 O 100 0 Q 100 8 Q 400 kO 100 0 kQ 100 6 kO 40 MQ 10 00 MO 9 80 MQ 10 20 MQ 4 Disconnect the test setup Diode and Continuity The following check verifies diode and continuity measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to and 2 Connect the THM420 COM input to the V Q Hz input with a shorting strap 3 Verify that the THM420 readout indicates approximately 0 000V and the beeper sounds 4 Disconnect the test setup Frequency The following check verifies frequency measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to Hz 2 Connect the frequency source output to the THM420 COM and the V Q Hz gt input connectors 3 Set the controls of the THM420 and the frequency source to each of the values listed in Table 12 then verify that the THM420 readout remains within the readout limits 10 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service THM420 Performance Verification Table 12 Frequency Accuracy Frequency Source Readout Limits 1 000 V 50 kHz 49 91 kHz THM420 Range 100 kHz Maximum 50 09 kHz 4 Disconnect the test setup DC Amperes The following check verifies DC ampere measurement accuracy 1 Turn the THM420 rotary switch to M
294. ure current without opening the circuit The meter automatically selects the correct measurement range and has a 4000 count resolution The maximum reading is 3990 The DCM910 meter provides true RMS readings for AC current ON OFF Figure 1 DCM910 Digital Clamp Meter Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 1 DCM910 Specifications Specifications The characteristics listed in this section apply under the following conditions m The instrument operates in a 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F ambient environ ment unless otherwise noted m The instrument warms up for at least 20 minutes NOTE All specifications are warranted unless marked typical Typical characteristics are not guaranteed but are provided for the convenience of the user Table 1 Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Description 2000 A for one minute 600 Va us CAT II 2 times per second nominal Overload P rotection Uninsulated Wire Voltage Measuring Rate AC Current Auto Ranging Ranges 400 A and 1000 A Uninsulated Wire Voltage Rating 600 Vams CAT II Resolution 400 A Range 0 1A 1000 A Range 1A Accuracy 40 Hz to 400 Hz 0A to 400A 1 9 of reading 8 counts 401 A to 1000 A 2 9 of reading 5 counts Crest Factor 1 4 to 2 0 add 1 0 to accuracy 2 0 to 2 5 add 2 5 to accuracy DC Current Auto Ranging Ranges 400A and 1000A Resolution 400 A Range 0 1A 1000 A Range 1A 2 Handheld and Bench
295. ure that the clamp is entirely closed Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits and record the reading Before each measurement set the calibrator output to off and press the DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the meter NOTE Any time a measurement appears to be out of tolerance turn the calibrator output off rezero the meter and try again 7 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service Disconnect the calibrator DCM330 Performance Verification Frequency Check To check the frequency accuracy perform the following steps 1 2 Set the meter function to Hz Select the appropriate coil as necessary to multiply the AC Current calibrator output to 20 A Position the clamp around the current loop of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Verify that the display reads within the specified Low and High Limits for each of the frequencies listed in Table 9 on page 10 and record the reading Disconnect the calibrator Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service DCM330 Performance Verification Test Records Serial Number Procedure performed by Date Table 7 AC Current Checks AC Current Tolerance Low Limit Test Result High Limit 0 0A 00 8 10 0A 11 0 11 0 100 0 A 102 7 102 7 300 0 A 306 5 306 5 400A 417 417 600 A 622 622 1000 A 1034 1034 1 At these frequencies
296. ust the generator output to produce a waveform four divisions in amplitude on the display Alternate the TRIGGER SLOPE push switch between the rising in and falling out slope settings Adjust VR403 for a 0 4 division downward vertical shift at the beginning of the sweep See Figure 10 for the adjustment location Trigger Center Use the following procedure to adjust the trigger center 1 40 Set up the oscilloscope as follows HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1 TRIGGER SET TO 50 In CH 1 AC DC AC Connect a 50 KHz sine wave to the CH 1 input Adjust the generator output to produce a waveform eight divisions in amplitude on the display Verify that the trigger point is within 1 5 divisions of the signal swing center Readjust the oscilloscope controls as follows TRIGGER SET TO 50 Out TRIGGER LEVEL Midway Adjust VR407 to position the trigger points equidistant from the center horizontal graticule line See Figure 10 for the adjustment location Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service TAS 200 Series Adjustment Procedures Probe Compensation To locate the adjustment for the following procedure refer to Figure 11 The Power and High Voltage board occupies the bottom left side of the instrument below the CRT d ASTIG FREQ ADJ G VR604 VR701 Instrument front SUB INTENSITY amp VR603 SUB FOCUS 12V ADJ E VR602 amp VR601 000000 Test points 00000
297. vision output at the low frequency trigger level listed for your instrument See Table 17 Table 17 DC Coupled Triggering Sensitivity Minimum Trigger Waveform Amplitude TAS 220 TAS 250 High Frequency Trigger 1 5 divisions 20MHz 50 MHz 4 Reduce the leveled sine wave generator output until the minimum trigger waveform amplitude is equal to the value listed in Table 17 If necessary adjust the oscilloscope TRIGGER LEVEL to maintain a stable waveform during the operation 5 Setthe leveled sine wave generator for a four division output at the high frequency trigger level listed in Table 17 6 Reduce the leveled sine wave generator output until the minimum trigger waveform amplitude is equal to the value listed in Table 17 If necessary adjust the oscilloscope TRIGGER LEVEL to maintain a stable waveform during the operation Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 17 TAS 200 Series Performance Verification Cursor Check 18 AT Measurement Accuracy AV Measurement Accuracy The following checks verify the cursor accuracy of your oscilloscope To check cursor AT measurement accuracy implement the following steps Set up the oscilloscope as follows VERTICAL MODE CHI CH2 HORIZONTAL SEC DIV 1 ms 2 Press and hold the oscilloscope CURSOR ON OFF push switch to activate the cursors 3 If not already displayed press and hold the AV AT 1 AT push switch until two vertical cursors appear on the display
298. wing steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the AC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of the AC current calibrator to 380 A at 50 Hz Position the clamp around the coil of the AC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Adjust VR1 to maintain the measurement error to less than 1 total while positioning the coil in the clamp Remove the clamp meter from the coil DC Auto Zero To adjust the DC zero calibration perform the following steps 1 Setthe clamp meter to the DC position 2 Short the Auto Zero points indicated in Figure 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 13 DCM330 Adjustment Procedures 14 DC 400 A Range DC 1000 A Range AC 400 A Range 2x woe Le Adjust VR2 until the display reads 00 0 5 counts Remove the short Press the clamp meter DCA AUTO ZERO button to zero the display Adjust VR3 until the display reads 00 0 To adjust the DC 400 A range calibration perform the following steps 1 2 Set the clamp meter to the DC position Select the appropriate coil to multiply the output of DC current calibrator to 200 A Position the clamp around the coil of the DC current calibrator and release the clamp trigger Ensure that the clamp is entirely closed Position the clamp to the center of the coil Adjust VR5 until the display reads 201 5 Remove the clamp meter from the coil To adjust the
299. with a constant line voltage load and ambient temperature Requires a 30 minute warm up 4 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Specifications Table 1 Operational Characteristics Cont Characteristic Description Parallel Tracking Program Accuracy Voltage 0 0596 25 mV 50 mV if rating voltage gt 36 V Current 0 296 20 mA Overvoltage Protection lt 2 0 6 V Load Effect Voltage lt 3 mV rear output lt 6 mV front output Current lt 6 mA x12 mA if rating current gt 3 5 A Source Effect Voltage lt 3 mV Current lt 6 mA GPIB Capability Optional IEEE 488 2 Memory Locations Store and Recall Timer Setting Time 1 to 65535 seconds Resolution 1 second SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO El 00 to 49 50 locations Table 2 Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Description Power Source 100 120 and 220 VAC 10 at 50 to 60 Hz 240 VAC 10 4 2 at 50 to 60 Hz Safety ETL listed to UL 1244 Certified to CSA C22 2 No 231 M89 Table 3 Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Description Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Nonoperating Temperature 10 to 70 C 14 to 158 F Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service 5 PS2520 Series Specifications Table 4 Physical Characteristics Characteristic Width Height Depth Weight Description 255 mm 10 04 inch 145 mm 5 71 inch 346 mm
300. y that the OUT indicator turns off 11 Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Remove the leads from the front panel OUTPUT 2 terminals and connect them to the OUTPUT 2 terminals on the rear of the instrument Maintain the equipment configura tion and polarities shown in Figure 2 Handheld and Benchtop Instruments Basic Service PS2520 Series Performance Verification 12 13 14 15 Repeat steps 5 through 8 above and verify that the difference between V1 and V2 is lt 3 mV Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator turns off Press SHIFT gt PARA INDEP to reconfigure the outputs for independent operation Verify that the PARA indicator turns off Disconnect the DMM and electronic load from the instrument Output 3 Use the following steps to check the OUTPUT 3 accuracy 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 Press SHIFT gt OUT 3 verify that the 3 indicator lights up on the display Ensure that the power supply output is disabled Connect the DMM and electronic load to the front panel OUTPUT 3 terminals Maintain the equipment configuration and polarities shown in Figure 2 Set the DMM to measure 10 VDC Set up the power supply as follows VOLTS SET 6V CURRENT SET 5 1A OVP SET 7N Press OUTPUT ON OFF Verify that the OUT indicator lights up on the display Enable the electronic load Adjust the load until the power supply CURRENT A readout indicates 5 000 A
301. y to the INDEP operating mode by disengaging both TRACKING switches both switches out Set the power supply MASTER AMPS VOLTS meter selection switch to VOLTS Set the power supply to 25 VDC using the digital display Connect the test oscilloscope and load resistors to the and terminals of the MASTER output as shown in Figure 3 See Table 8 for the appropriate load resistor values Verify that the peak to peak ripple viewed on the oscilloscope is less than 3 mV PS280 and PS283 Performance Verification Set the power supply to the PARALLEL operating mode by engaging both TRACKING mode switches both switches in Verify that the peak to peak ripple viewed on the oscilloscope is less than 2 5 mV Set the power supply to the SERIES operating mode by disengaging the right TRACKING mode switch switch out Verify that the peak to peak ripple viewed on the oscilloscope is less than 5 mV Table 8 Load Resistor Values for Ripple Checks INDEP 150 70W 0 50 5W PARALLEL 70 140 W 10 Q 30 W SLAVE Current Ripple The following check verifies the SLAVE current ripple 1 10 Set the power supply to INDEP operating mode by disengaging both TRACKING switches both switches out Set the power supply SLAVE AMPS VOLTS meter switch to VOLTS Set the power supply to 25 VDC using the digital display Connect the test oscilloscope and load resistors to the and terminals of the SLAVE output as shown in Figure 3

Adjustment Procedure

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents